JP2017221819A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine allowing a player to play a game at ease.SOLUTION: Variation control means performs variation to at least first opening for varying variation means from a second state to a first state in satisfaction of a first condition and second opening for varying the variation means from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous than the first opening in satisfaction of a second condition. If a game ball enters a ball entry port and identification information is displayed dynamically while the variation control means is varying the second opening, a start display mode for indicating start of the dynamic display is displayed by start information display control means. Thus, a player can easily understand execution of the second opening and hence can play a game at ease.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 75

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Then, in order to increase the winning of the game ball to the start opening, an ordinary electric accessory is provided at the start opening. When a lottery that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the ordinary electric accessory is provided, and a lottery is performed as a game ball passes through the throughgate. There is known a pachinko machine that operates an electric accessory for a certain period of time to make it easy to enter a game ball into a starting port.

  In such a pachinko machine, there are a plurality of opening patterns of ordinary electric accessories, and there are two opening patterns: a long opening in which the opening time is longer than normal and a normal opening in which the opening time is set shorter than that. Some are set. In addition, there is a type of notifying the player in advance of the long release by discriminating in a state in which the fluctuation before the start of the normal symbol lottery is held.

JP2013-13528A

  In this type of pachinko machine, the same holding symbol was displayed for the holding ball that was established after the long opening was executed and entered the starting port, even after entering the ball after the long opening was completed. It is difficult for the player to identify the reason why the holding ball is established, and it is difficult to determine whether or not the player has made a big hit by releasing long. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with peace of mind.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes a lottery of games based on a game entrance into which a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the game entrance. Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information necessary for the determination, the validity determination means for executing the determination on the basis of establishment of the lottery conditions based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and the validity determination means The dynamic display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination as to whether or not, the storage means for storing the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery stored by the storage means Display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of information, a first state in which a game ball easily enters the entrance, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state Variable means that can be changed to When the first release and the second condition for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state are satisfied, the player is more advantageous to the player than the first release. And a variable control means for changing at least the variable means from the second state to the second opening to be changed from the second state to the first state, and while the variable control means is changing to the second opening, When a game ball enters the entry ball port and the identification information is dynamically displayed, start information display control means for displaying a start display mode indicating the start of the dynamic display on the display means; It is what has.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the lottery information necessary for executing the lottery of the game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter is the lottery information acquisition means. Obtained by Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display control unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means.

  The variable means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening that is variable by the variable means from the second state to the first state and when the second condition is satisfied, the player is more advantageous than the first opening. The variable control means changes the second opening from the second state to the first state.

  When the game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, the start display indicating the start of the dynamic display The mode is displayed on the display means by the start information display control means.

  Thereby, while changing to 2nd opening | release, it can alert | report to a player intelligibly that the identification information based on the game ball having entered into the entrance is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the engineer can play the game with peace of mind.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the notice display mode per long time. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the notice display per long time, (b) is a typical example of the notice display of the change with respect to the holding ball which won the 2nd starting opening during the long time. FIG. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the notice display of the change with respect to the holding ball which won the 2nd starting opening during a long time. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the notice display of the change with respect to the reservation ball which won a 2nd starting opening during a long time. (A) is the upper perspective view which showed the positional relationship of the frame button of a pachinko machine, and a touch switch, (b) showed the display mode in case the total frequency | count of a day fluctuation of a pachinko machine was displayed. It is the figure which showed an example, (c) is the enlarged view which expanded and showed the changeover switch of the pachinko machine. (A) is a timing chart showing the period setting from power-on of the pachinko machine, (b) is an example showing a background image displayed in the preparation period of the pachinko machine, (c), It is an example which showed the background image displayed in the time production period of a pachinko machine. (A)-(b) is the figure shown about the example of the notice effect display aspect of the touch sensor displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus of a pachinko machine, (c) is the 3rd symbol display apparatus of a pachinko machine. It is the figure shown about an example of the notice effect display mode displayed by. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode A selection, (b) is a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode B selection. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode A selection, (b) is a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode B selection. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed. It is the figure which showed the timing chart about each background mode when the fluctuation pattern in which addition time was set was selected. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main controller, and (c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a RAM in the main control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the figure which showed the list of the change pattern command and addition command which are output from the main control apparatus of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table B which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the special figure which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table B. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern selection table B which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table, and (b) is a special figure which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table C. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM content of a voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the model which showed typically a part of RAM content of a voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the pending | holding effect selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the prefetch effect lottery table, (c)-(d ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a prefetch effect selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notice selection table A, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the notice selection table C typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the touch notice selection table, (b) is the figure which made a list about the setting of a changeover switch. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a notice. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory release process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding effect selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number transfer process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch effect selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation change process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the notice effect display process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the mode switching process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the addition command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the opening display mode of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the case where the pachinko machine in the second embodiment is won per normal symbol for a long time, the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 0, and the game ball wins the second starting port. It is the timing chart which showed an example until special symbol 2 starts change when special symbol 1 is fluctuating (remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more), and (b) is a pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 6 is a timing chart of a display mode showing an example of a state in which the special symbol 1 does not change when a normal ball is won for a long time and a game ball is won at the second start opening. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table of the usual figure opening effect of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the common figure opening process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in FIG. 6C, and FIG. 10C is a normal variation pattern selection table A (mode 1) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 6D is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the normal variation pattern selection table B (mode 2) that is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing timing chart showing an example when the change stop timing of the special symbol notified by the rainbow-colored reserved symbol of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is the preparation period, (b) It is the timing chart which showed an example in case the fluctuation period of the special symbol alert | reported by the rainbow-colored holding | maintenance symbol of the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment straddles the preparation period from the time production period. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation change process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the list of the change pattern command and addition command which are output from the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment as an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the addition command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RTC connected to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (B) is a conceptual diagram of the structure where the setting switch of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment is operated by a switching motor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the notice of the fish charge which uses the touch sensor and board | substrate side touch sensor of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the card notice which is a notice effect which uses the touch sensor 290 and the board | substrate side touch sensor of the frame side of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 15) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 and a touch sensor 290 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

  The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later is changed or the content of the notice effect is changed. The In addition, the touch sensor 290 is, for example, based on the operation of the player's touch sensor 290 based on the display content of a dedicated effect using the touch sensor 290 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. Be changed. Further, the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving a driving tool or the like provided in the gaming machine, for example. The details of the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. However, the touch switch 290 is disposed closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the frame button 22, Normally, when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the touch switches are respectively arranged at positions where the player's hand can react.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The start opening 64 a, the second start opening 64 b, the electric accessory 64 c, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 15) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the special symbol 2 ( The first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 (hereinafter, special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be referred to as a special symbol) performed for the entry to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, Whether the symbol is a big hit or not is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the type of jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). After 30 seconds), a special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first start port 64a while the special symbol variation display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of the ball is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, even when a ball enters the second starting port 64b while the special symbol is changing, the number of balls entered is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated on the first symbol display device 37. Both are also shown for the third symbol display device 81. Note that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode. As will be described in detail later, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of reserved balls, the variation display mode of special symbols, the determination result, etc. than the 1st symbol display device 37. The normal player is configured to play a game by looking at the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and the lottery The variable display according to is started. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 64b has priority over the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 64a, and the special symbol 2 is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery with respect to the holding ball of the first starting port 64a is configured to be executed when there is no holding ball at the second starting port 64b. While the change of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the change of the special symbol 1 is not executed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured such that there is no period that varies at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured not to vary at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary simultaneously. By configuring in this way, more games can be drawn in a short time and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be played more time-efficiently.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 64 b has an open state in which the game ball can be guided to the entrance port on both sides of the entrance port where the game ball enters, and the entrance to the entrance port. It has the electric accessory 64c provided with the blade | wing member which can be rotated to the closed state which regulates. The electric accessory 64c is operated for a predetermined time from the closed state to the open state based on a winning (winning) of a normal symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, normally, it is held in an upright state so as to prevent the entry of game balls from both sides of the entrance, so that the game balls are prevented from entering between the blade members. The first start port 64a is disposed. Therefore, the second starting port 64b is normally configured to be able to enter the ball only when the electric accessory 64c is activated. Therefore, normally, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first start port 64a, and the player plays the game ball by launching the game ball to enter the first start port 64a. It will be a thing.

  Note that the special prize opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 enters the special gaming state is provided immediately below the second start opening 64b. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first start opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first start port 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. There are two types of normal symbol hits: a normal hit and a normal hit, and a long time in which the opening time and the number of releases increase. When the normal symbol is hit normally or for a long time, the electric accessory associated with the second start port 64b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second start port 64b is opened. The ball is easy to enter. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable symbol display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is retained up to four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also shown. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, a special gaming state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds is set. Thereafter, when the jackpot is A, as a value added after the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot until the start of the jackpot game of the next special symbol ( Move on to the special symbol). On the other hand, “hit B” has a higher probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Even in the high probability state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is similarly set up.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the normal symbol has a big hit probability (Special symbol normal state or low probability gaming state). In addition, the “ordinary symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short or short-time game state) means a game state in which the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b. Say. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (normal game state). It shows that. Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends is referred to as a special symbol probability change period.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “big jackpot A”, the period from the end of the “big jackpot A” to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probability variation period. The period during which the special symbol lottery (such as 100 times or 100 times) is executed may be set as the probability variation period. Further, both “big hit A” and “big hit B” may be set to have a predetermined number of periods and a probability variation period. The probability variation period may naturally be a certain variation period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”.

  In addition, while the “high probability state of the special symbol” continues, if the jackpot of the special symbol becomes a new and the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the “high probability state of the special symbol” It continues from the end of the jackpot of the new special symbol until the start of the next jackpot game.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 that is performed in accordance with the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning prize) is being executed. By displaying the variation, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after the variation is ended, The number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, is indicated by the lighting state.

  The ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b while the variable display of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37. In the case of a ball, the number of entered balls is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of times of suspension is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

  Note that, for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are respectively assigned for displaying the symbol and displaying the number of reserved balls. By comprising in this way, it can comprise so that a player can distinguish the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 more easily.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning prize), it is used as a trigger for a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the starting port entered in the first symbol display device 37. Variation display of symbols is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 15) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of “1, 3, 4, 7, 9”, which are odd numbers, are all stopped and displayed. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” which are even numbers are aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm for displaying the third symbol in a variably manner, and the others. The lower third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first start port 64a, and the small area Ds2 is , A region for displaying the notice effect image, and the small region Ds3 is a region for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the second start port 64b. It is.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed at the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbol are displayed so as to be visible, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, doors, characters, characters, and the like are displayed in the small area Ds2 in the center, and it is suggested that the player is likely to make a transition to a big hit than usual, or that a normal symbol is hit. . In addition, by lowering the transparency of the main symbol displayed on the active line L1 and displaying it by increasing the transparency of the main symbol displayed other than that, the player can recognize the effective line more easily. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, in the sub display area Ds, the display mode of the reserved ball based on entering the first start port 64a displayed in the left small area Ds1, and the right small area Ds3 Is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the reserved ball of the second start port 64b displayed on the screen. Specifically, one “◯” is displayed for one holding ball of the first starting port 64a, and when there are two holding balls, two “○” are displayed side by side. The Similarly, “◯” is displayed side by side corresponding to the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, with respect to the holding ball of the second starting port 64b, “Δ” is displayed for one holding ball except for the holding ball that has entered the ball for a long time of the normal symbol. If the ball enters the second start port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), one “★” is displayed for one holding ball.

  Thereby, the holding balls of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, that is, the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball that has entered the second start port 64b is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the holding ball has been generated for a long time. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 include not only the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., but also a notice display such as a character display or a character, A display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is configured to be held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the reserved ball number is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the reserved ball number. You may make it display in the aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) which changes only by the part. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the normal display per unit for a long time of the normal symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81 and the long start of the normal symbol enter the second start port 64 b. A notice display mode that is executed for a ball that has been balled will be described. First, FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the opening of the electric utility item 64c due to a long time of a normal symbol is executed. Here, the lottery result of the changing normal symbol is determined, and when the lottery result is per long time, it is displayed in the small display area Ds2 in FIG. 5B three seconds before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. The door symbol door is slid in the opening direction (the left-right direction of the display area), and as shown in FIG. 5A, the symbol of the winning opening simulating the shape of the second starting port 64b is displayed.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the timing at which the normal symbol is stopped and the electric accessory 64c is released, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the electric accessory at the winning opening displayed in the small area Ds2 is activated. The symbol in the open state is displayed, and the player is informed that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the display for opening the door symbol of the small region Ds2 is displayed, a dolphin symbol is displayed at the upper left of the small region Ds3.

The symbol of this dolphin displays a character “opening” in a balloon in accordance with the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (ordinary symbol stop display timing) to notify that the electric accessory 64c is in an open state. Is done. As described above, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time different from the normal hit, the third symbol display device 81 is notified in advance before the stop display is performed. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opportunity to open the electric accessory 64c.
Here, if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is the maximum number of four, and the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a long variation time such as reach, the player Even if a game ball is fired and a ball enters the first start port 64a, it becomes an invalid ball that does not become a reserved ball, so the game ball is stopped and the reserved ball is digested. There are many cases where a game is played after waiting. In such a case, even if the ball is started to fire on the basis of the fact that the normal symbol is won for a long time and the electric accessory 64c is opened for a long time, It is difficult to enter the ball, and the ball cannot enter the second start port 64b by effectively using the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

  However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is informed in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be in an open state before a predetermined time (three seconds before in this embodiment) before it is released for a long time. The player can play the game while preventing the opportunity to enter the ball into the second starting port 64b.

  Next, FIG. 6 (a) shows that a special ball is inserted into the second starting port 64b when the electric accessory 64c is operated in an open state on the basis of a long time of normal symbols. It is the display mode which showed the state by which the four hold balls are set to the pattern 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, the holding symbol of the holding ball formed by entering the second starting port 64b in the open state of the electric accessory 64c per long time is “ One “★” is displayed. When there are four reserved balls, four “★” are displayed side by side as shown in FIG.

  Next, FIG. 6 (b) shows that the electric accessory 64c shifts from the open state to the closed state, and a lottery is executed for one reserved ball for the special symbol 2 to start the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. It is the figure which showed the state made. For a holding ball that is formed by entering the electric accessory 64c by hitting an ordinary symbol for a long time, a dolphin displayed in the small area Ds3 performs a notice display by a balloon at the start of the change every time. In FIG. 6A, when one of the four reserved balls starts to change, “?” Is displayed by a balloon. This “?” Is not included in the lottery that starts to fluctuate, or the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is included (all are out of place) than when the winning determination result is included. It is set so that it can be easily selected (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24A), and it is informed that the probability of being hit by the player is low.

  Next, FIG. 7 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when one of the reserved balls is further digested from the state of FIG. 6 (b) and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is started. In FIG. 7A, at the start of the variation of the special symbol 2, a character “chance?” Is displayed to notify the player of a notice display related to the result of the determination of success / failure. The notice display of “chance?” Is set to be easier to select than the winning case when the determination result (including the start of variation, including the determination result of the holding ball of the special symbol 2) is off. Thereby, the player can predict the success / failure determination result in advance.

  Next, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state in which one reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is further digested from the reserved number of FIG. 7A and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is started. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a case where a dolphin displays a notice “chance !!” with a balloon at the start of the variable display of the special symbol 2. The notice display of “Chance !!” is set to be easier to select than when it is missed when the result of the success / failure judgment (including the start of fluctuation, the result of the judgment of the holding ball of the special symbol 2) is win. (See FIG. 24A). Thereby, the player can predict the success / failure determination result in advance.

  Next, FIG. 8 shows a case where one special symbol 2 reserved ball is further digested from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 7B, and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is started. It is the figure which showed the display mode. In FIG. 8, at the start of the change of the special symbol 2, the characters “Large chance !!” are displayed to notify the player of a notice display related to the determination result of the special symbol 2 being changed. The notice display of “Large chance !!” is set so that it is easier to select when the determination result of the special symbol 2 that is fluctuating is winning than when it is out of place (see FIG. 24A). . Thereby, the player can play a game in expectation that the winning / failing determination result of the changing special symbol 2 is a big hit.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern selected in the variation display of the special symbol 2 is always reachable when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is zero. The variation pattern to be selected is selected regardless of the determination result. That is, based on the fact that the normal symbol is per unit for a long time, the electric accessory 64c is in an open state, a plurality of balls enter the second start port 64b, and then start to change in order. Even if the result of lottery of the selected ball is out of the range, the variation pattern that will be reached is always selected in the variation display of the last reserved ball.

  In addition, in the case of a change in the holding ball caused by entering the second starting port 64b by operating the electric accessory 64c for a long time, a notice display relating to the determination result is continuously displayed every time when the change starts. Configured. Furthermore, as the number of consecutive times increases, it is configured so that a notice display that makes it possible to expect that the determination result is a big hit is easy to select, so that the player becomes the normal symbol for a long time, The lottery executed when the ball is entered into the second starting port 64b can be made to feel that it is easier to win a lottery than the lottery executed by winning the first starting port 64a at the normal time. Furthermore, in the case of the special symbol 2 held ball that has been generated for a long time, the last variation (the lottery executed when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 0) will always select the variation pattern that will be reached. Since it was comprised, even if a lottery result is unsuccessful, the expectation degree to a player's jackpot can be raised. Therefore, the player can expect the variation display of the special symbol 2 triggered by a long time as a special variation display, and can play a game with a higher expectation that the normal symbol will be per unit for a long time. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5B, the dolphin notice display displayed in the small area Ds3 at the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating per-hour, Although it is configured to display the characters “open”, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol stops as early as the time from when the player launches the game ball to the second start port 64b. You may comprise so that it may display before displaying. By comprising in this way, a game ball can be awarded to the 2nd starting port 64b, using longer time effectively.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that it may alert | report about 2 second earlier than the time which a game ball arrives. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that it becomes advantageous too much for a player. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is advantageous to the player while protecting the profit of the game store side.

  Next, the positional relationship between the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 22 will be described with reference to FIG. The touch sensor 290 is provided side by side in front of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. The touch sensor 290 incorporates a reflective photosensor inside, and an output portion from which the LED of the photosensor is output is attached with a cover member made of a transparent black resin member. It is arranged on the surface of the pachinko machine 10. In the touch sensor 290, when a player puts a hand or the like close to a predetermined interval to the photosensor output unit and blocks the light from the LED, the LED light is reflected and input to the input unit of the photosensor. Thus, it is a configuration for detecting. The photo sensor 290 is electrically connected to the input / output port of the sound lamp control device 113, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether the touch sensor 290 is on. Yes. The touch sensor 290 is an operation means that can be operated by the player in order to change the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the frame button 22.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A to 11B, an effect is produced in which the touch sensor 290 is continuously detected by the player and the indicator is changed (stored). As the indicator can be changed to a larger scale, the player is more likely to receive a jackpot on the player.

  Further, since the touch sensor 290 is provided on the player side with respect to the frame button 22, the touch sensor 290 is configured to be easily detected and turned on even when the player presses the frame button 22. . Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is pressed, the touch sensor 290 can be turned on.

  Next, FIG. 9 (b) shows the total number of fluctuations since the player turned on when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 8 is a display example when displayed on 81. FIG. In this way, the player can check how much the game is being played.

  Next, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing the setting switch 291 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 3). As shown in FIG. 3, the setting switch 291 is provided below the RAM erase switch 122 so as to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, the setting switch 291 is constituted by a dip-type changeover switch. The input is switched by rotating, and the setting can be switched from “1” to “4”. A display window for setting confirmation is provided on the external cover so that the setting value can be confirmed, and the setting value can be visually recognized from the display window by rotating the setting switch 291. As shown in FIG. 15, the setting switch 291 is configured to be electrically connected so that a setting signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, each setting is arranged so as to be switched when it is rotated every 90 degrees, and a lock mechanism that is lightly locked so that it is difficult to rotate from other areas when it is rotated to each set value is provided. .

  FIG. 26B shows the control content set by each setting of the changeover switch 291. When the setting is 1, the display using the RTC 292 is set to be effective, and the display of the total number of changes shown in FIG. 9B is set to be effective. Similarly, setting 2 is set so that RTC 292 is invalid and the total variation count is displayed, setting 3 is set so that RTC 292 is valid and total variation count is not displayed, and setting 4 is invalid for RTC 292. The display of the total number of fluctuations is set to non-display.

  Next, the time effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a timing chart showing a period in which a time effect is executed from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the power is turned off in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, an RTC (real time clock) 292 for measuring time, which will be described later, is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to measure the time since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Has been.

  When 54 minutes (period A in FIG. 10 (a)) have elapsed since the power was turned on, a preparation period (period B in FIG. 10 (a)) for executing a time effect for 1 minute thereafter is set. Thereafter, a time effect period (period C in FIG. 10A) in which the time effect is executed is set. Here, when the preparation period is set, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), a background image on which characters “Soon, super fish time starts” is set, and a time effect is started for the player soon. Notification is performed to indicate that. Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 22, the variation time of the special symbol selected in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is 30 seconds at the longest, and the variation pattern executed before the preparation period ends. Is configured to do.

  As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 22 (a), “superreach” is not set for the change pattern that starts to change during the preparation period. The display mode is also not displayed. In the time production period, when the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, the special fish school that informs that the jackpot is confirmed is configured to be displayed more easily than usual, and super reach and notice display are displayed during the preparation period. By configuring so that it is not displayed, the freshness of the notice display in the time effect period can be enhanced.

  After the preparatory period of 1 minute has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the background image on which the characters “in super school time” indicating that the time production period is in progress is displayed in the third symbol display. It is displayed on the device 81. In the background image of this time effect period, an image in which a plurality of small fish swim is displayed, so that the player can have an impression different from the normal time. Then, when the time production period of 5 minutes elapses, the background image is changed to a normal background image (a background image corresponding to the mode selected before the preparation period), and a special symbol lottery is subsequently executed. Is done. After that, when 54 minutes have passed, the preparation period is set again, and then the time effect period is set. In this way, it is repeatedly executed at the same time interval.

  If the jackpot game is started before the preparation period or if the jackpot game is started during the preparation period, the period corresponding to the time at that time after the jackpot game ends (periods A to C) Is set. In this period, for example, if the jackpot game is started in the preparation period and the end of the jackpot game is the remaining one minute of the time effect period, a time effect of 1 minute is executed.

  With this configuration, the power cable is connected to the power supply outlet in the hall while the power switch (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Similarly, the other similar pachinko machines 10 are also connected to the power supply outlets. A plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be simultaneously powered on by providing a switch such as a breaker that can switch whether or not to supply electricity to the power supply outlet.

  Therefore, by simultaneously turning on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the present embodiment, the timing at which the time effect is executed can be adjusted by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In addition, in the present embodiment, before the time effect period is set, since the preparation period constituted by a time longer than the longest variation time of the special symbol is set, the start of the time effect period is further started. Can be matched.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the preparation period and the time effect period are executed is set as described above. In addition, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a time effect on each pachinko machine 10 when a predetermined time elapses is executed, and only the pachinko machine 10 that wins the lottery executes the time effect. May be. Further, it may be configured such that the player can select whether or not to execute the time effect by operating the frame button 22 or the like at the time when the time effect is executed or at the time of standby.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 will be described. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the change of the special symbol. When the notice effect display is determined and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reduced to the upper right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 displays an indicator as shown in FIG. Before the touch sensor 290 reacts (detects), the indicator is displayed with a scale of “0” and indicates to the player that the touch sensor 290 reacts to increase (charge) the indicator scale. "!" Is displayed. Then, when the player puts his hand over the touch sensor 290 (touches the touch sensor 290) to turn the touch sensor 290 on (reacted state), the scale of the indicator is increased. Yes. FIG. 11A shows a state where the indicator is raised to the scale “1”. FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state where the indicator is raised to the scale “2”.

  In this embodiment, although details will be described later, the change of the indicator that operates based on the touch sensor 290 being turned on is determined in advance by lottery. The indicator lottery is executed based on the determination result of the special symbol starting to fluctuate, the fluctuating pattern, and the value 223k of the production count t. A larger scale is more easily set when the determination result is a win than when it is out of place. Further, when the selected variation pattern is a “super reach” variation pattern, a larger scale is more easily selected than when “normal reach” is selected. Note that the present embodiment is configured such that the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is not selected when the fluctuation pattern is “reaching for a short time” or “out of a long time” when reach is not reached.

  By configuring in this way, when the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed at the start of the change of the special symbol, the player identifies that the change that has started the change display is a reach display mode, Next, the photo sensor 290 can be operated to enjoy the game so that the scale of the indicator can be raised. When the scale of the indicator is increased to a large scale, the player can increase the expectation for the jackpot and can enjoy the game more.

  FIG. 11C shows the lower right (small area Ds3) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, ten times) during the special symbol variation display. A notice effect display (special notice display) simulating a placard is displayed. Thus, by displaying the notice effect based on the player's specific operation, the player can be prevented from being bored during the game. This notice display is a notice display set in the process of S1913 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  With reference to FIGS. 12-13, an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the background mode A and the background mode B displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the reach display mode is achieved when the super reach variation pattern is selected and the background mode A is selected. FIG. 12B shows a display mode on the third symbol display device 81 when the same variation pattern as that in FIG. 12A is selected and the background mode B is selected at the same timing. FIG. As described above, even when the same variation pattern is selected, the displayed background contents are different due to the selected background mode being different, and furthermore, the timing of the display in the reach display mode is also different. . In the background mode B shown in FIG. 12 (b), a pseudo symbol having the same configuration as the main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the actual main symbol is reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. Fluctuation is displayed. By configuring in this way, in the background mode B, it can be recognized as if it was stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the detachment. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the background mode A, an effect display indicating whether or not to develop into a special reach is executed. On the other hand, in the background mode B, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the pseudo symbol imitating the main symbol starts to fluctuate again and is displayed variably, and the actual main symbol is displayed on the right as shown in FIG. 13 (b). Reduced down and displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the variation display mode in each background mode shown in FIGS. 12 to 13 described above. According to the background mode selected by the player with the frame button 22, the special symbol variation display is started based on the variation start timing. Whether the background mode A is selected or the background mode B is selected, the start timing of the change is the same.

  In the present embodiment, although details will be described later, when the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines a variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection table is displayed. In addition to the type, a variation pattern command indicating a fixed time and an addition command indicating an addition time for adding a time determined in the variation pattern are output to the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, the command output from the main controller 110 for determining the variation pattern is composed of two commands, that is, the addition command indicating the addition time in addition to the variation pattern command. In addition, it is comprised so that it may become the variation time determined by lottery when the fixed time and addition time which a variation pattern shows are totaled. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can select an effect with a high degree of freedom by this addition command.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after the start of the change, the change display set in a fixed time is executed. In the case of this example, the fixed time is set to 8000 ms, and is configured with the same time as the fluctuation time of short-time deviation. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 makes the same change as the short-time deviation with respect to the display control device 114 in the background mode A based on this fixed time, and then the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed in a reach display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 12A). On the other hand, in the case of the background mode B, after the same fluctuation display as that of a short-time deviation is displayed, a pseudo symbol similar to the main symbol is displayed, and a stop symbol indicating a deviation in the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. The symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 12B). The SW effective period, which is the period during which the background mode can be changed, is also set to 4000 ms as in the case of a short time deviation.

  The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 indicates that the addition command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the SW valid period has elapsed and the background mode cannot be changed by the player. Based on the addition time, an effect after a fixed time has elapsed is determined based on the selected background mode, and a display command is output to the display control device 114. In the example shown in FIG. 79, in the background mode A, an effect for notifying the player whether or not the super reach shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the background mode B is selected, after the fixed time has elapsed, the pseudo symbol starts to fluctuate, and a fluctuating display similar to that for a short time deviation is executed. Note that the actual main symbol continues to be variably displayed at high speed while being reduced to the small region Ds3. After that, while the variable display is displayed again with the same fluctuation display (fluctuation time) as that of the short time deviation, specifically, while the high-speed fluctuation is occurring, the pseudo symbol is replaced with the actual main symbol. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating reach display. Thereafter, the background mode A and the background mode B execute the same super reach display mode at the same timing.

  In this way, in a configuration in which a player can select a plurality of background modes in one variation display of a special symbol so that different variation displays can be enjoyed, a plurality of effects are each reproduced and processed. In the configuration in which the reproduction process is executed at the timing based on the change of the mode or the switching of the background mode, there is a problem that the control load of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 increases. . However, as in this embodiment, as a command for selecting a variation pattern, a command that indicates a fixed time and a command that indicates an addition time are used as commands to select a variation pattern. By controlling to execute the fluctuation display of (changes the fluctuation display at the time of passage and the background only), and when the period in which the background mode can be changed has passed, by determining the effect based on the command indicating the addition time, A control process for determining only one effect is sufficient, and the control load can be reduced. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 does not need to calculate the remaining fluctuation time and determine an effect or the like, and the load necessary for the control can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed, and stops after the variation ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol is displayed. Done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b operates for a predetermined time. As a result, the second start port 64b is easily put in a ball. The number of passes through which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is not limited to four times as in the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, but is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first start port 64a and a second start port 64b through which balls can enter are disposed. When a ball enters the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, a first entrance switch and a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. When the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch are turned on, the main controller 110 draws the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and displays the first symbol display device 37 according to the lottery result. LED 37a. The first start port 64a and the second start port 64b are also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same. However, the number of winning balls is not limited to this, and may be different. For example, when entering the first starting port 64a, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 64b is set as three prize balls, and when entering the second starting port 64b, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 64b is set to the first number. The number may be set larger than the number of prize balls for one start port 64a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give more prize balls to the player when the normal symbol per unit for a long time, and it is possible to further increase the value per unit time of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game in anticipation of a bonus other than the special symbol, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. In addition, the player can obtain more prize balls during the short time and the probability change period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's possession ball is extremely reduced during the short time and the probability change period.

  On the other hand, when the number of winning balls in the second starting port 64b is set to be smaller than that in the first starting port 64a, it is possible to design so that more game balls are awarded to the second starting port 64b in the probability change period or in a shorter time. Thus, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a higher number, and an efficient game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the game time of the probability variation period during the time saving, and to increase the sales at the game store side.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type in the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 A special hit type counter C2 to be used, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. Further, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing a special symbol 1 reserved ball and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b composed of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided. Is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the same value is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). The configuration is back. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 has a timing at which the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is set as the special symbol. When the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the big hit random number table matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 is reached at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The aspect is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot types, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are set, and either of “big hit A” or “big hit B” is set by the special hit type counter C2. It is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-299. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability. Stored in the random number table. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Stored in Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, in the special hit type counter C2 set in the big hit type selection table (not shown), the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the special hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the special bonus type counter C2 (random value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation display counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 17B) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 is set for each gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state, probability variation gaming state). In addition, although it demonstrates in detail by description about the selection of the fluctuation | variation pattern in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 mentioned later, in the main control apparatus 110, it is based on the determination result, the number of reservation balls, and the value of the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1. Thus, the contents of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 18 to 22, main controller 110 selects a variation pattern, and in sound lamp controller 113, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on a variation pattern command from main controller 110. The mechanism to be determined will be described. In the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, variation pattern selection tables for determining the variation patterns of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set as shown in FIGS. Has been. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table selected in the normal gaming state is shown, but it is also set in each of the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the time data measured by the RTC 292, and the normal time of 54 minutes is measured. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set after the preparation period. The Although details of each period will be described later, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected by the different period varies depending on the set period. Is set. Here, even if a different effect is set, the effect is composed of the change time indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the change time of each effect, the determination result, whether or not there is a rough change. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. By configuring in this way, main controller 110 does not need to determine an individual variation pattern, and can reduce control addition. Further, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can also be suppressed.

  With reference to FIG. 18, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, each variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS <b> 1 corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol 1 that starts the variation and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 at the start of the variation. It becomes the composition to choose. Here, the variation pattern to be determined is a rough type and variation time of the variation pattern. Various variations of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as variation patterns to be selected when the common determination result of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is big hit. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and the determination result is correct, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. When the determination result is a win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of holdings. Here, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern that becomes “super reach” is set more easily than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the determination result is a win, the “super reach” variation pattern is executed and the frequency of the big win increases. When the “super reach” variation pattern is selected, the player wins the big hit. It is easy to have expectations.

  It should be noted that the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, which is a variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot, is subjected to a reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time. This is a variable display mode in which the variable display is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode after the variable display. The variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot is configured with a relatively short variation time compared to the variation pattern of the “super reach” jackpot described later.

  Super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are jackpot variation patterns of “super reach”, are displayed in the reach display mode, as in the case of normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, and then the characters are displayed, and the reach display mode is displayed. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in is executed. The variation pattern of “super reach” is configured with a variation time relatively longer than the variation pattern of “normal reach”.

  Next, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 is correct is out, as a variation pattern for detachment, “displace for a short time (for short time)”, “disconnect for a long time (for short time) ) ”,“ Normal reach miss ”, and“ Super reach miss ”. The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “short-time deviation”, is composed of a fluctuation time (800 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is displayed in the main display for a predetermined time without being displayed in the reach display mode. Is displayed in a variable manner, the display mode in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, is configured with a fluctuation time (12000 ms) longer than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach loss variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “normal reach loss”, is different from the normal reach jackpot variation pattern in that the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the reach display pattern. It is a display mode which shows that the constituted lottery result is out of place. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than a super reach deviation variation pattern, which will be described later, when the determination result is unacceptable. Moreover, the super reach loss variation pattern that is “super reach loss” is a display mode that is different from the various super reach jackpot variation patterns in that it is finally displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss.

  When the determination result of special symbol 1 is out of place, the variation pattern to be selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4 The variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratios of.

  When the number of reserves is 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the variation pattern of “deviating for a short time” and is not selected. Thereby, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the variation time of the selected variation pattern becomes relatively long, and during this time, it is easy to allow the game balls to enter the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, a large ratio is set for selecting a variation pattern of “deviating for a short time”. As a result, when the number of reserves is close to the upper limit number of 3 to 4, it is possible to select a short variation pattern so that even if the ball enters the first start port 64a, the number of invalid balls exceeds the number of reserves. The malfunction which becomes can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12B, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A selected when the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is started in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) will be described. When the determination result is a big hit, it is configured in the same manner as the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination is wrong, each variation pattern is divided into a variation type counter for the case where the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 and the case where the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 4. It is assigned and set corresponding to the value of CS1. Note that when the number of reserved symbols is 0, only the variation pattern for reach is set. Therefore, when the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol 2 is 0, the special symbol 2 always starts to vary. A variation pattern is selected. As a result, when the ball wins the second start port 64b per long time or normal hit, a variation pattern that reaches even when the ball is missed is selected whenever the number of reserves is zero. Therefore, the variation of the special symbol 2 is likely to reach the player, and the player can play the game with the expectation of the jackpot than the variation of the special symbol 1.

  Moreover, it is a structure in which a plurality of balls are likely to win a prize and a reserved ball is likely to be generated for a long time, and a special notice display effect is executed for each change of the reserved ball. In the last change of the reserved ball, the reach change pattern is always selected, so that a more fresh effect can be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the number of holdings is 1 to 4, if the result of the determination is wrong, only the fluctuation pattern of short-time deviation and long-term deviation is set, and the fluctuation pattern to reach is set. It has not been. By configuring in this way, the effect of whether or not the fluctuation when the reserved number becomes 0 is a big hit is displayed during the display of the variation pattern that starts changing when the reserved number is 1 to 4. It is possible to show a player a plurality of variations as if they are related effects. In addition, despite the out-of-range fluctuations, it is possible to have an expectation for the jackpot for the previous fluctuations.

  FIG. 12C shows a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table B for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol 2 in the short-time or high-probability gaming state (probability change).

  The normal winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interruption process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is When the value of the winning random number set by the normal random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. Also, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) is used for the normal symbol low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for a high high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. Further, the normal symbol hit type and the long hit per hour are set, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hit gaming state, the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is opened in the opening state in 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. Further, during the time reduction and the probability change period, the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long hit is a hit in which the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is activated in the open state for two seconds regardless of the gaming state is repeated twice.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c executed in the probability variation period and the opening operation in the long time are set to be the same during the time reduction in the normal time. The opening operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, for 3 seconds, the opening operation may be performed once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ball enter the second starting port 64b more when hitting for a long time, and during normal games, it is possible to easily execute the variation display in the special symbol 2, The change of the game effect can be enjoyed by the player by the change display of the special symbol 2 in which the notice display with a fresh taste is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the value of the normal random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 20 at the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol normal hit It is determined that Further, if any of 21 to 28, it is determined that the normal symbol is about a long time. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is normal hit. It should be noted that when the normal symbol has a high probability, the normal symbol per hour is not set. However, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c is the same as that for a long time. The hit is substantially the same as the hit for a long time.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 64c is operated can be lowered, and the frequency of entering the second starting port 64b can be reduced. Therefore, it is centered on making the ball enter the first start port 64a, and the player's consumption of the game ball can be increased, and the profit on the game store side can be increased. On the other hand, in the short time and the probability variation period where the probability is high, the opportunity to operate the electric accessory 64c can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the chance to enter the second starting port 64b is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state advantageous to the player while suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball. Therefore, a player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play a game for a longer time.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is determined. As shown in FIG. If the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is “5 to 20”, the second start port 64b is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” as normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second start port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. If the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is “21 to 28”, the second start port 64b is opened “2 seconds × 2 times” for a long time.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17A). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol). As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second start port 64b is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second start port 64b is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times” is very long, so that the ball easily enters the second start port 64b. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second start port 64b is opened for “2 seconds × twice” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). The update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 42), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a number-of-releases counter 203h, a long-time release flag 203i, a time-shortage counter 203j, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal hit random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first starting port 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first start port 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 33 and S405 in FIG. 35). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second starting port 64b, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 38).

  If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 39, S703: No).

  The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of opening times of the electric approximator 64c.

  The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric approximator 64c.

  The long-time release flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long-time hit is being made. The long-time release flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S629 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Although not shown in the figure, it is set to OFF based on the fact that the normal symbol per hour has ended. Specifically, in the process of S1105 of the electric accessory release process (FIG. 43, S1005) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the release number counter 203g is 0. .

  The hour / minute counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203j has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the number of the hour / medium counter 203j.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 23A, a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A), a prefetch effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24C). )), A pre-reading effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24C to 24D), a notice selection table 222e (see FIGS. 25A to 25B), and a touch notice selection table (see FIG. 26A). ) Is stored. Also, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start Flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, normal winning information storage area 223g, sub long time opening flag 223h, opening effect flag 223i, hold effect counter 223j, effect counter 223k, time effect execution flag 223m, setting Time storage area 223n, preparation period flag 223o, start period flag 223p, SW effective time counter 223q, sensor effective time counter 223r, touch counter 223s, background mode storage area 223t, variation counter 223u, SW counter 223v Directing mode storage area 223w, addition command storage area 223X, addition command reception flag 223Y, other memory areas 223z are at least provided.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 61) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first start port 64a is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 61).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display a power-on main image (not shown). It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is generated, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 even though the changing effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, the first starting port 64a is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters the ball, so that the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second starting port. As it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 28). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 30 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 30).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the case of the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 61). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3505 in FIG. 71 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 63B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 63 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3401 in FIG. 71A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 71B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, describing the contents of drawing instructions is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 63 (b) ) (See S2303), pointer update processing (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 31), and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 31, the back image used for one frame image, the third symbol (design 1, Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 63 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 72). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 72). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 63B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 299, 99, and 239, respectively). When it reaches, each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first start port 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the processing of S208 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. A special symbol lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2 Whether it will be A or big hit B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), it is determined which of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type (S217). If the jackpot is B, 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203j of the RAM 203 (S218). Thereafter, the process of S220 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability change period (S219). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S220), and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 1 or more (S221), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 1. If it is above (S221: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203e (S222), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203j is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 33) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “extra special symbol” is performed. It is the process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the variation production performed by the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81 while performing.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, each of the special symbol random number counter C1 and the special symbol type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively. A value is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability (S303). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, and 299 ”are set, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these hits When the random number value matches, it is determined that the bonus symbol is a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. Three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol jackpots, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits these, It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, and the two types of special big hits (big hit A, big hit) In B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), “60 to 99” If it is in the range of "", it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, normal symbol time short period 100 times).

  In the processing of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies voice lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode within the same variation time. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. ing. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol and stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 being set, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Next, the addition command set in the variation pattern selection table 202b is set corresponding to the selected variation pattern (S310). As shown in FIG. 82, this addition command is determined on the basis of the result of determination of success / failure, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 19, the addition command is composed of a fixed time and an addition time, and indicates the addition time. In the present embodiment, with respect to the variation pattern that becomes super reach, the fixed time is configured with a variation time similar to that of a short time deviation, and the addition time is configured with a time other than the fixed time. By configuring in this way, in the fixed time, the variation time until reaching the reach display mode can be set with the same variation time as the short-time deviation, and the addition command can be used to display characters such as super reach from the reach display mode. Can be set based on. Therefore, since the variable display mode having a long variable time can be divided and set for display, the control load at the start of the fluctuation can be reduced.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S307 or S309 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 42). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 32), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first starting port 64a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first start opening 64a (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  If there is no winning at the first starting port 64a (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first starting port 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 retained ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are used as special symbols in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the one holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, about S407-S413, about each process of S401-S406 demonstrated above, the process with respect to having won the 1st starting port 64a is changed into the process with respect to having won the 2nd starting port 64b, Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. Note that when a game ball is won at the second starting port 64b and stored as a holding ball, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are acquired and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in the empty holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b.

  In this way, by acquiring the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to the special symbol 1 for the special symbol 2 based on the entrance to the second starting port 64b, the special symbol 2 is obtained. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number between the symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant for both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  After performing the process of S413, a prefetch process is performed (S414). Details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be described with reference to FIG. 36, but based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. Thus, a process for determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of variation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. In addition, a part of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of the variation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the determination of success / failure is acquired at the time of entering the ball, and a counter not related to the determination of success / failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining fairness of the game Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the prefetching process (S414) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S414).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 36, S414), first, determination of whether or not to start the change is made based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The determination of whether or not the change starts is a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area indicating whether the game state at the start of change is a normal game state (low probability) or a probability change game state (high probability game state). The determination is made based on whether or not the counter value stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is variably displayed and the hit type.

  In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a win (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a win (S422: Yes), it is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 whether the hit type is a big hit A (S423). When it is determined that the hit type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating the jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot B is set is set (S425). Also, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the determined result of the determination is not good (S422: No), a winning prize command is set (S426).

  As described above, since the result of the determination of whether or not prior to the start of the fluctuation is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a holding ball is established, the sound lamp control device 113 The success / failure determination result and its hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can change the player's advance notice determination result for the hold ball to the player based on the winning command (for example, the color of the hold symbol can be changed to a color for notifying the determination result). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination of the success / failure in the holding ball. In addition, since the winning command is output as one winning command for the holding ball every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the holding ball.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second start port 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display indicating the hit, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (S608), and this process ends. The normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of FIG. 38 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S609 (S609: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S609 (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S627 or S631 of FIG. In the device 83, a stop display (lighting display) is set. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S635 of FIG. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S627 of FIG. 38, the processing of S631 or the processing of S635.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S611). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is set (S612), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S630 or the process of S634 in FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the process of S612 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S608). In the normal symbol variation start process (S608), the normal symbol variation start setting executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is set. This is a process for execution.

  It is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S621). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S624.

  In the process of S621, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S621: No), it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time is short (S622). If there is neither a certain change nor a short time (S622: No), the process proceeds to S624.

  If the probability change or the time is short (S622: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, the normal hit acquired in the process of S607 in FIG. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S623). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 17A).

  In the process of S624, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 in FIG. Based on the low probability normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S624). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 17A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is within the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal hit of the normal symbol, and if within the range of “21 to 28”, the normal symbol of the normal symbol is determined. If it is determined that it is a long time, and it is within the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, it is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 17A).

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because, during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting opening 64b is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second start opening 64b as much as possible. The special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second starting port 64b. Therefore, even if it is suppressed that a ball enters the second starting port 64b during the big hit of the special symbol, the second starting port Many balls enter 64b. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second start port 64b becomes maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S623 or S624 is a normal symbol win (S625), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S625: Yes) Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol hit type is for a long time (S626). If it is determined that the normal symbol hit type is long-time hit (S626: Yes), the display mode for long-time hit is set (S627). In the process of S627, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a start command per long time is set (S627), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (S629). Then, the process proceeds to S630.

  If it is determined in the process of S626 that the normal symbol hit type is normal hit (S626: No), the normal hit display mode is set (S631). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a probability change or time saving (S632).

  If the probability change or the time is short (S632: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S633). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S633: Yes), the process proceeds to S634. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second starting port 64b as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 64c are set.

  In the process of S633, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S633: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is set to 2 seconds and the number of opening is set to 2 times. (S630), and the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S630, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of S632, if there is no probability change or time saving (S632: No), the process proceeds to S634. In the process of S632, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second start port 64b is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S634), and the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S634, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of S625, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S625: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S635). In the process of S635, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S636.

  In the process of S636, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S636). If the probability change is in progress (S636: Yes), the change time of the change display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S637). This process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S636 is not in the process of being surely changed (S636: No), the fluctuation display fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S638), and this process ends. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second start port 64b becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second start port 64b.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening for a long time are the same as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probabilistic state and the short time state, but not limited to this, the opening time and the number of times of opening are different. You may comprise so that it may set.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703). : No), the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S706, whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate at the start of the change is determined based on the acquired value of the normal random number counter C4 (S706), and the process proceeds to S707. In the process of S707, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a hit (S707).

  If it is determined in the processing of S707 that the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a win (S707: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a hit type for a long time (S708). If it is determined that the hit type of the normal symbol winning / failing determination result is per long time (S708: Yes), a long time regular symbol winning command is set (S709), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S708 that the hit type of the normal symbol winning / failing determination result is normal winning (S708: No), a winning symbol winning command is set (S710).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S707 that the normal symbol winning / determining determination result is unacceptable (S707: No), an unrecognized common figure winning command is set (S711), and this process is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S913. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), a state command is transmitted based on the long-time release flag 203i (S908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 32) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 33) or the start winning process (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process or the prefetch process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second start port 64b is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the processing of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S630 in FIG. 38 or the processing of S634 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The details of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 34), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) or the process of S310 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 34). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S637 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38) or the processing of S638, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S610 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 37), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S627 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 38) or the processing of S631. (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). The initial value of the normal random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory release process (S1005). The electric accessory release process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process in S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37). In this case, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is performed.

  In the electric combination release process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 64c is being opened (S1101). If it is determined that the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c depending on whether the opening time counter 203h is 0 (S1102). If it is determined that it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1102: Yes), the electric accessory 64c is set to be closed (S1103), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1102 that it is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1102: No), the opening time counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S1104), and this processing ends. As a result, 1 can be subtracted at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), so that the time can be accurately measured from the value set in the process of S1109.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the electric accessory 64c is not being opened (S1101: No), it is determined whether the opening count counter 203g is greater than 1 (S1105). When the number-of-releases counter 203g is 0 (S1105: No), this process ends. If the opening number counter 203g is larger than 1 (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106). If it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: No), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1106 that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: Yes), the opening counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1107), and the opening of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1108). A value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h (S1109), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 60, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the current power-off process in S1318 is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 46). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 46), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 46). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). This status command indicates whether the normal symbol is being hit for a long time based on the long-time release flag 203i in the processing of S908 of the startup processing (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is a command. If it is determined in step S1212 that a status command has been received (S1212: Yes), the sub long open flag 223h is set based on the received status command (S1213). Here, when the received status command indicates that the long time is being hit, the sub long time release flag 223h is turned on. Set 223h to off.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, a command that can determine whether or not a normal symbol is being hit for a long time is output from the main control device 110, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. Can do.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1214, a time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the time setting process (S1214), which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not the time effect is to be executed. If the setting is to execute the time effect, the time information is acquired from the RTC 292. Then, based on the time information, a process for setting the preparation period and the time effect period in the set time storage area 223n is executed.

In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), first, it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is set to “1” or “3” (S1221). When it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is not the setting “1” or the setting “3” (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting “1” or the setting “3” (S1221: Yes), time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1222).
As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. Note that the RTC 292 is a timing unit having a battery inside, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function and is configured to be able to determine “year / month / day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas, or to control to display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S1223). Here, in this embodiment, the term data is set to three years within three and a half years, which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC 292. A date three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture is set as the time limit data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that a delay or the like occurs in time due to a lack of battery capacity or the like, and the start timing of the time effect cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the date is three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture, and to set the time effect execution flag 223m described later to ON. When the voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined and the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON. Also good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC 292 to a voltage value that allows normal operation.

  In the process of S1223, when it is determined that the acquired time information is out of the time limit data, that is, three years or more have passed (S1223: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

  In the present embodiment, the preparation period and the time effect period for 24 hours are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n based on the acquired time information. It is also possible to set 54 minutes to execute the game, measure the period by counting down or counting up, and set the preparation period based on the passage of 54 minutes. In addition, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the change display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, a prefetch effect selection process is executed (S1313). Details of the prefetch effect selection process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the pre-reading effect process (S1313), the process of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. Details of the synchronized effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1314 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown flag are turned on (S1317), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1318). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When a variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), variation pattern reception processing is executed (S1402). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the fluctuation pattern reception processing (S1402) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception process.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process (S1402), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1421), and the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (S1422), a process of selecting a variation pattern or a notice effect is executed based on the set effect mode.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, the variation pattern selection process (S1422) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422), first, the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1431). It is determined whether or not the effect mode set in effect mode storage area 223w is effect mode A (S1432). If it is determined that the production mode A is set (S1432: Yes), the result of the determination of the success / failure, the number of reserved items and the variation type counter CS1 from the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table A (FIG. 18 or FIG. 21). Based on the value, the variation pattern is selected and set (S1433). Thereafter, the notice effect display is selected and set based on the result of the determination of the success / failure and the value of the effect counter 223k from the notice selection table A (see FIG. 25A) (S1434). It is selected and set from the touch advance notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1435).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1432 that the effect mode A is not set (S1432: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B is set (S1436). If it is determined that the production mode B is set (S1436: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol (see FIG. 20A or FIG. 22A). Is set (S1437).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1436 that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode C is set (S1436: No), the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table C (FIG. 20 (b) or FIG. 22 (b)), the variation pattern is selected and set (S1438). A notice effect display is selected and set from the notice selection table C (S1439). The notice effect display is selected and set from the touch notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1440).

  In this way, the selected variation pattern can be switched based on the set effect mode. Further, the selected variation pattern is the same as the variation time specified by the variation pattern command by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the result of the determination, and the content of the effect display displayed and the reach display mode at the variation time. (Normal reach, super reach, or its type) is changed and selected by the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the determination result regarding the profit of the player and the variation time related to gambling are not changed according to the one determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and therefore, according to the predetermined design value of the pachinko machine 10. Can play games.

  The notice effect is also determined based on the determination result at the start of change, the contents of the change pattern (normal reach, super reach, etc.), and the value of the effect counter 223k. There is no need for processing, and the control load can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the timing for displaying the notice is determined in advance by the variation pattern, and the display control device 114 displays the notice at that timing by setting a display notice display command for indicating the timing. To be set.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is executed, the hold effect selection process is executed (S1423). In the hold effect selection process (S1423), a process of setting a notice effect to be displayed with respect to the start of fluctuation of the hold ball won in the second start port 64b for a long time is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the hold effect selection process (S1423) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the hold effect selection process (S1423).

  In the hold effect lottery process (FIG. 50, S1423), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1451). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is 0 or less (S1451: No), is the hold ball that starts the change being the start of change of the hold ball whose release effect flag 223i is set to on? It is determined (S1452). If it is determined that the change of the reserved ball for which the release effect flag 223i is set to on is started (S1452: Yes), the release effect flag 223i is set in accordance with the number of reserved balls for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON. The value of the effect counter 223j is set (S1453). Here, the release effect flag 223i is based on the long time of the normal symbol so that the holding ball formed by opening the electric accessory 64c and entering the second start port 64b can be distinguished. This flag is set to ON in response to the holding ball. In the process of S1453, for example, if the number of reserved balls for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON is 3, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is set to 3. On the other hand, in the process of S1452, when it is determined that the change of the holding ball in which the release effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S1452: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S1451, if it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1451: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1454). Based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223k, a notice effect display mode corresponding to the value of the hold effect counter 223j is selected from the hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A) and set (S1455).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the hold effect selection table 222b has a hold effect for each of the determination results of whether or not the start of variation or the determination result of the hold ball whose release effect flag 223i is set to ON. Corresponding to the value of the counter 223j, each notice effect display is set by the value of the effect counter 223k. Therefore, each notice effect display mode is determined based on the determination result, the value of the effect counter 223k, and the value of the hold effect counter 223j.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 21), even when the result of the determination is wrong, if the number of held balls is zero, Since the variation pattern of “out of reach” is set to be selected, when “1” indicating that the number of held balls indicated by the holding effect counter 223j is “0”, a notice display mode such as “large chance” is displayed. Is configured to be more easily selected than the case where the value of the hold effect counter 223j is “2 to 4”, and is configured to give the player more expectation of the jackpot.

  Therefore, when the player enters the second starting port 64b for a long time, a continuous effect is executed between the reserved balls, and the reach is always displayed in the last change. It is possible to play a game with a higher expectation than a lottery that enters the first starting port 64a (a lottery that enters the first starting port 64a in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the player can play a game with a higher expectation of occurrence per long time, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  When the process of S1455 is executed, a display notice display command for display that instructs the third symbol display device 81 to display the notice effect display set in the process of S1455 is set (generated) (S1456). Thereafter, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1457), and this process ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the hold effect selection process (FIG. 50, S1423) is executed, the hold number transfer process is executed (S1424). In the number-of-holds transfer process (S1424), if the special symbol 2 is variably displayed, it indicates that the ball is a hold ball that has been established based on the opening of the electric accessory 64c based on the long time of the normal symbol. A process of shifting the release effect flag 223i to the area indicating the previous hold number is executed for the hold ball in which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the reservation number shifting process (S1424) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the reserved number shifting process (S1424). In the number-of-holds migration process (FIG. 51, S1424), first, it is determined whether or not it is a change start opportunity of special symbol 2 (special diagram 2) (S1461). If it is determined that it is the trigger for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 (S1461: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved ball for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462). If it is determined that there is no reserved ball for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved balls for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON are stored (S1462: Yes), the release effect flag 223i corresponding to each number of reserved balls is held one by one in advance. It is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the number of balls (S1463). On the other hand, in the process of S1461, when it is determined that it is a change start opportunity of the special symbol 1 (S1461: No), this process ends.

  The release effect flag 223i is individually set corresponding to each of the reserved balls 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 and the execution area, and is set to ON for the held ball that has been established for a long time. The When the notice effect display corresponding to the digestion of the reserved ball is set as the reserved ball is digested, the release effect flag 223i is also shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball. Therefore, it can be accurately determined whether or not the ball is a holding ball that has been established for a long time.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After executing the number-of-holds migration process (S1424), the variation counter 223u is incremented by 1 (S1425), and this process ends. The fluctuation number counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is reset to 0 which is an initial value when the power is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is configured. However, the number of fluctuations is not limited to this, and a dedicated backup power source is provided even when the power is turned off. The clock data may be acquired by the RTC 292 so that the number of fluctuations per day can be identified. When the time data is periodically acquired from the RTC 292 and the date is updated, the value of the variation counter 223u is stored in the storage area corresponding to the date, and then the value of the variation counter 223u is the initial value. A configuration for resetting to 0 is conceivable.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S1401 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 54) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when a reserved ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), a held ball number command reception process is executed (S1407). In the reserved ball number command reception process (S1407), based on the received reserved ball number command, the stored ball numbers are respectively stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. To determine whether the normal symbol is being hit for a long time, and when it is being hit for a long time, the release effect flag 223i is turned on for the newly stored reserved ball of the special symbol 2 Execute the process set to. In the process of S1407, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114 is set. After the process of S1407 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1407) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1407).

  In the reserved ball number command receiving process (FIG. 52, S1407), first, the number of held balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are respectively extracted. The number of reserved balls is set (S1471). Next, it is determined whether or not the sub long open flag 223h is on (S1472). If it is determined that the sub long-time release flag 223h is on (S1472: Yes), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command for the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command for the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473: Yes), the release effect flag 223i for the corresponding reserved ball number is set to ON (S1474). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1472 that the sub long-time release flag 223h is off (S1472: No), or when it is determined in the process of S1473 that the reserved ball number command for the special symbol 2 has not been received. (S1473: No), this processing is terminated.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, the special symbol. 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114 is displayed. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the process of S1406, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). When a winning command is received (S1408: Yes), winning command reception processing is executed (S1409), and winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S1410). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process. As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are respectively stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b. Further, as soon as each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original value of each of the counters C1 to C2 is obtained from the original value separately from the big special lottery drawing of the special symbol. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the winning command receiving process (S1409) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1409). In the winning command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub long time release flag 223h is ON, that is, whether or not the long time is being hit (S1481). If it is determined that the sub long open flag 223h is off (S1481: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub long open flag 223h is on (S1481: Yes), it is determined whether a special symbol 2 winning command has been received (S1482).

  If it is determined in the process of S1482 that the special symbol 2 winning command has not been received (S1482: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command for the special symbol 2 is received (S1482: Yes), the release effect flag 223i corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set to ON (S1483).

  Here, the opening effect flag 223i is set for each holding area and execution area. Therefore, the release effect flag 223i corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the received special symbol 2 winning command is set to ON. As a result, it is possible to distinguish and identify the reserved sphere stored for a long time and other reserved spheres.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the process of S1408, if a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a normal symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When it is determined that the normal symbol winning command is received (S1411), the normal symbol winning information indicated by the received winning command is set in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1412). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the main controller 110 acquires the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, and the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is the normal value. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203f. Further, as soon as the value of the normal hit counter C4 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is performed from the acquired value of the normal random number counter C4 separately from the original normal symbol win lottery. In this case, various information obtained in the event of pre-reading is predicted (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a normal symbol winning command including various types of information (whether or not, winning type) obtained by prefetching is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol winning command is not received in the processing of S1411 (S1411: No), it is determined whether an addition command is received (S1413). If it is determined that the addition command has been received (S1413: Yes), the information indicated by the received addition command is set in the addition command storage area 223x (S1414). The addition command reception flag 223y is set to ON (S1415).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1413 that an addition command has not been received (S1413: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1416), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S1505. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 49) S1433, S1437, and S1438 is performed. In any process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1505.

  In the processing of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1505: No), the processing of S1510 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. Obtain (S1507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the processing of S1509, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1509 is executed, the process proceeds to S1510.

  In the processing of S1510, it is determined whether or not the addition command reception flag 223y is on (S1510). It is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 (S1511). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 (S1511: Yes), the display effect content is determined based on the received addition information based on the set background mode (S1512). ). Thereafter, a display addition command is set based on the set display effect content (S1513).

  Here, in the processing of S1512, the display effect content corresponding to the information indicated by the received addition command and the set background mode is selected and set. This display content is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol 1 is determined, the determination result is wrong, the number of holdings is 2, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 160, as shown in FIG. From 110, “A1B4” is output as the variation pattern command, and “B0B2” is output as the addition command. The sound lamp control device 113 determines a display mode at a fixed time corresponding to each background mode based on the variation pattern command, and outputs the command to the display control device 114. Thereafter, after the SW effective time has elapsed, only the display mode corresponding to the set background mode is output to the display control device 114 so as to be set at the start of the addition time.

  In the above-described example, when the underwater background mode is selected when the SW valid time becomes 0, the variation display mode after the reach display mode (after the addition time) of the super reach deviation variation pattern A1 is set. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, a chance effect (see FIG. 13A) is set. In addition, when the beach background mode is selected, display modes after the reach display mode of the super reach deviation variation pattern A2 are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, a continuous effect (see FIG. 13B) is set.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce processing for setting data and the like necessary for starting the change of the special symbol set at the start of the change. Furthermore, even when it is necessary to set different display modes corresponding to a plurality of background modes, display data corresponding to each background mode is set for a period including a time that can be switched by the player. In the subsequent period, display data corresponding to the set background mode has only to be set, so that it is possible to reduce the control processing necessary for the special symbol variation display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the prefetch effect selection process (S1313) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 46) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect selection processing (S1313). In this prefetch effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), a process for selecting (determining) the notice effect display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the prefetch results of the normal symbol and the special symbol.

  In the pre-reading effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set (S1601). The determination whether the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set is executed by determining whether the pre-reading effect is selected and the display period is set. Note that a special flag is set, and the flag is set to ON based on the fact that the prefetch effect is selected, and is controlled to be turned off when the display of the prefetch effect is completed. You may comprise so that it may discriminate | determine whether the production is set.

  If it is determined in the process of S1601 that the normal symbol pre-reading effect is set (S1601: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is not set (S1601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol hold for a long time is stored in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1602). . If it is determined that the normal symbol holding for a long time is stored in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the long-time opening effect (S1603).

  The long-time opening effect is a symbol schematically showing the electric accessory 64c by opening the door displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. This is a notice effect that is displayed and informed in advance that the electric utility item 64c will be released for a long time. The timing for starting the long-time opening effect is three seconds before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time. In this way, by configuring so as to display the opening effect for a long time from 3 seconds before the long time, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opening of the electric accessory 64c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to easily enter the second starting port 64b from being missed. In addition, the player can play the game in the hope that the opening effect will be executed for a long time, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In the process of S1603, when it is determined that it is not the timing to execute the long-time opening effect (S1603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to execute a long-time opening effect (S1603: Yes), the start of the opening effect is set (S1604). A display opening effect command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the long time opening effect shown in FIGS. 5A to 6A on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1605). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol holding for a long time is not stored in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1602: No), it is determined whether it is a pre-reading effect executable period. (S1606). Here, the pre-reading effect executable period is a period in which the opening effect is not being executed for a long time and the jackpot gaming state is not performed. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect executable period is set as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate.

  In the process of S1606, when it is determined that it is not the pre-reading effect executable period (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the pre-reading effect executable period (S1606: Yes), whether the special symbol or the normal symbol hold is stored is stored as a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter Judgment is made based on the value of the normal holding ball number counter 223c (S1607). If it is determined that there is no special symbol or normal symbol hold (S1607: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol or the normal symbol is on hold (S1607: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and the prefetch effect is executed from the prefetch effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 24B). A lottery for determining whether to perform or not is executed (S1608). Here, in the pre-reading effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24B), when a holding ball that is a big hit is stored in the special design holding ball, the holding ball that is a big hit is stored in the special design holding ball. The probability of lottery with a pre-reading effect is set higher than when there is no reserved ball with no special symbol (special symbol). Therefore, the player can predict in advance the success / failure determination result of the special symbol based on the frequency at which the pre-reading effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the content of the pre-reading effect but also determining the frequency.

  It is determined whether the lottery result in S1608 has a pre-reading effect (S1609). If it is determined that the lottery result indicates no prefetching (S1609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result has a pre-reading effect (S1609: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and from the pre-reading effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24C to 24D). A prefetch effect is selected (S1610). A display prefetch effect command indicating the selected prefetch effect is set (S1611).

  Here, the pre-reading effect selection table 222d has only a pre-reading effect lottery table (FIG. 24C) and a normal symbol hold for selecting a pre-reading effect when there is a holding ball of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. In this case, a prefetch effect lottery table (FIG. 24D) for selecting a prefetch effect is formed. When there is a special design holding ball, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), a door displayed on the third symbol display device 81 showing a sign (notice) of whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed is displayed. The number of productions that vibrate slightly is set, after which the door is opened and a comment is displayed therein. This comment is a notice display mode for letting the player predict the lottery result of the special design holding ball, indicating that the lottery result is a win (bonus), “Done!” Or “Congratulations! And a character such as “chance!” And “great chance!” That are easier to select than the case of losing in the case of winning is selected based on the value of the production counter 223k. Has been.

  With this configuration, the player can predict or determine the lottery result of the special symbol in advance with a comment displayed when the door is opened. Therefore, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has a low expectation for the jackpot, it can be enjoyed with the content displayed by the pre-reading effect, and the game can be enjoyed early. You can prevent getting bored.

  Further, when there is no special symbol hold (when only a normal symbol hold), as shown in FIG. 24D, only the door vibration effect is selected. When the opening effect is executed for a long time, the door vibration effect is executed twice. Therefore, when the effect of two door vibrations is selected, the player expects that the door is opened and the opening effect is executed for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation for the long-time opening effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), since the door opening effect is executed and the comment is displayed whenever the door vibration effect is executed three or more times, If the door continuously vibrates, count the number of times and expect the door to open. Further, when the door vibration is executed four times, it is configured to be executed only when a special ball holding ball is stored in the special symbol holding ball. By being executed, the jackpot can be predicted at an early stage. Further, when the door vibration is executed, it is possible to expect the player to vibrate four times and to give the player a sense of exhilaration (exciting feeling).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the synchronous effect management process (S1314) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 46) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronous production management process (S1314), a process of acquiring time information from the RTC 292, determining whether it is a preparation period or a time production period based on the time information, and setting a production mode indicating it. Run.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 56, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1701). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is off (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is on (S1701: Yes), time information “hour, minute” is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1702). It is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o indicating that the preparation period is in progress is on (S1703). If it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1703: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1702 is the time effect period set in the set time storage area 223n (S1704). ). If it is determined that it is not the time effect period (S1704: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the time effect period (S1704: Yes), the preparation period flag 223o is set to OFF (S1705). The start period flag 223p is set to ON (S1706). The production mode C is set in the production mode storage area 223w (S1707). Thereafter, the effect variation process is executed (S1708), and this process ends.

  Here, the effect changing process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect changing process (S1708). In this effect changing process (FIG. 57, S1708), if the success / failure determination result is true for the changing special symbol in response to the transition from the preparation period to the time effect period, the special fish group is displayed in the third symbol display. This is a process for executing the process of displaying on the device 81 and informing in advance that it is a big hit. Here, the special fish school is a notice effect display in which red fish swarms from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the notice announcement display of the normal fish school is composed of blue fish, and notifies the player that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high.

  In the effect changing process (FIG. 57, S1708), first, it is determined whether the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is changing (S1721). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1721: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1721: Yes), it is determined whether or not the determination result of the changing special symbol is a big hit (S1722). When it is determined that the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a jackpot (S1722: Yes), a display notice display command for displaying the display of the special fish school is set (S1723). On the other hand, in the process of S1722, when it is determined that the result of the determination is wrong (S1722: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the transition is made from the preparation period to the time production start period, the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing is notified in advance by the special fish school. It is possible to display a notice effect that is advantageous to the user. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the time production period is a period advantageous to the player, and it is possible to play a game while looking forward to the time production period. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was set as the structure which alert | reports a success / failure determination in advance by shifting to a time production period from a preparation period, but it is not restricted to this, For example, when it is a jackpot, when the determination result is notified In addition, it may be configured to execute a process of switching so as to always stop and display with the symbol that notifies the big hit B. Then, during the jackpot game executed in the time effect period, the jackpot type may be configured to execute whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A. With such a configuration, even if the time effect period becomes a big hit game, a special effect can be provided to the player, and the player can be more entertained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the pending number display update process (S1306), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the reserved number display update process (S1306).

  In the number-of-holds display update process (FIG. 58, S1306), it is first determined whether or not the number of symbols on hold has changed (S1801). If it is determined that there is no change in the reserved symbol (S1801: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a change in the number of reserved symbols (S1801: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802). When it is determined that there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802: Yes), the corresponding special reserved symbol (in this embodiment, a star-shaped reserved symbol) and others A display hold command indicating a hold symbol of (a hold ball other than the release effect flag 223i being turned on) is set (S1803). On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, if all the opening effect flags 223i are off (S1802: No), the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are set. Based on this, a hold command for display indicating a hold symbol to be displayed is set (S1804).

  In this way, by determining whether there is a reserved ball for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON, the reserved symbol of the reserved ball can be changed to a special symbol different from the normal symbol and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the reserved ball has won the second starting port 64b per long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 59, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not it is in a standby state in which a demonstration screen is displayed (S1901). If it is determined that the standby state is set (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (S1902). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is set to "1" or "2" (S1903). When it is determined that the setting switch 291 is set to “1” or “2” (S1903: Yes), the display variation for notifying the display controller 114 of the number of variations indicated by the value of the variation counter 223u. The number command is set (S1904). Thereafter, the process of S1905 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that it is not in the standby state (S1901: No), the process of S1905 is executed.

  In the process of S1905, a sensor input process is executed (S1905). Here, the sensor input process (S1905) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (S1905) which is a process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the sensor input process (FIG. 60, S1905), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223r is set to a value greater than 0 (S1921). When it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is a value equal to or less than 0 (S1921: No), it is determined whether the notice effect display is set (S1922). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (S1922: Yes), the sensor valid time set as the notice effect display is set in the sensor valid time counter 223r (S1923). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1922 that the notice effect display is not set (S1922: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1921 that the sensor effective time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1921: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (S1924). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has operated the touch sensor 290 with a hand or the like (S1925). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S1925: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926: Yes), it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (during the time effect period) (S1927). When it is determined that the production mode is C (S1927: Yes), the process of S1928 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the production mode is other than the production mode C (S1927: No), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1926, when it is determined that the sensor valid time counter 223r is 10 seconds or less (S1926: No), the process of S1928 is executed. In the process of S1928, the value of the touch counter 223s is incremented by 1 (S1928), and a display preview display command corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223s is set (S1929). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value set for the selected touch advance notice display (S1930). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value (S1930: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223s is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1931). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is not the upper limit value (S1930: No), this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. After the sensor input process (S1905) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is a value greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is in effect (S1906). If it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 or less, that is, it is not within the SW valid time (S1906: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S1907). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1907: No), the process of S1914 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1908).

  If it is determined in step S1908 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1908: No), the value of the SW counter 223v is incremented by 1 (S1909). The value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1910). Thereafter, it is determined whether the SW counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911). When it is determined that the value of the SW number counter 223v is equal to or less than the upper limit value (S1911: No), the process of S1914 is executed.

  When it is determined that the value of the SW number counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911: Yes), a special effect lottery is executed (S1912). A display notice command for display indicating the notice effect determined by the lottery is set (S1913). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1914. In the process of S1914, it is determined whether a new variation pattern has been set (S1914). If it is determined that a new variation pattern has been set (S1914: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223q based on the set variation pattern (S1915). On the other hand, if it is determined in S1914 that a new variation pattern has not been set (S1914: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223q is a value greater than 0 (S1906: Yes), the value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW valid time counter 223q and updated. (S1916). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1917). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1917: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1917: Yes), it is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1918).

  In the process of S1918, when it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1918: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is off (S1918: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223t (S1919). A display switching command to a variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (S1920). Then, this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 73, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 61). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 62, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 71A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 71A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning prize) to the first start port 64a, and the start instruction of the variation effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 31) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 63B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, the process corresponding to the command is executed, the display demo command, When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp controller 113, the image controller 237 is notified of the continuous notice A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. 31 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is executed. Migrate to

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302), as shown in FIG. 64, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command. (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, it is determined whether the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501). In the variation pattern selected in the production mode A, a plurality of background modes are set. In the variation pattern selected in the production mode B and the production mode C, only one type of background mode is set. .

  In the present embodiment, in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, one background mode is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of background modes may be set in the same manner as the effect mode A.

  In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the received variation pattern is a variation pattern for which a plurality of background modes are not set (S2501: No), a display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and the display data table is determined. The buffer is set (S2502). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501: Yes), a display data table corresponding to each background mode is determined. Is set in the display data table buffer (S2503). The display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 233k is set to active (S2504). Thereafter, the process of S2505 is executed.

  Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and the set display data tables can be processed by moving the pointer in synchronization. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers to active and switching.

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2502 or S2503 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2505). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the set variation display data table is turned on, and other variation display data tables are also displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to OFF (S2506). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2506, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2507), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialization is performed (S2508). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2509), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing in S2508 is updated, and the pointer 233f is changed from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The drawing contents defined at the indicated address are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is set by the processing of S2505. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to 236a, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2507, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined in step S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (before big hit A and big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing the value of the stop type counter updated every time (see FIG. 63 (b)). (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2603). Thereafter, the process returns to S2401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). When it is determined that the display notice display command for display is received (S2408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (S2409). Details of the notice effect display processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation display. Or setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of notice of a big hit or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66A, the notice effect display processing (S2409) will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing the notice effect display processing (S2409).

  In the notice effect display process (FIG. 66 (a), S2409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the advance notice to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received display advance notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S2702).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2703), and time data representing the variation time is counted based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705).

  In this way, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and even if it is the same variation pattern, it can be shown to the player as if it is a different display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the selection of the notice display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table for notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be overwritten by setting the notice display. Good.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2408 that there is no display preview display command, it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S2410: Yes), a mode switching process is executed (S2411). The mode switching process (S2410) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66B, but based on the operation of the frame button 22, a process for switching to the display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66B, the mode switching process will be described (S2411). FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing the mode switching process (S2411). In the mode switching process (S2411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 233k (S2801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S2802). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S2802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (S2803). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S2802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (S2804).

  Thus, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode of the changing pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display state in the standby state is set to be displayed as the set background.

  The process for changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

  The back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the back-on state is set to on. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF, the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set back image change flag is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the set back image discrimination flag, The back image type to be displayed is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified as time passes, and the RAM type (resident video is stored with the image data corresponding to the back image range. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be turned on. A back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Also, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2410 that there is no display switching command (S2410: No), it is determined whether there is a display addition command (S2412). If it is determined that there is a display addition command (S2412: Yes), addition command processing is executed (S2413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 67, the addition command processing (S2413) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this addition command processing (S2413).

  In the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413), first, a display data table of display effects corresponding to the received command is determined, and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer and set (S2901). ). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to active). The The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

  The changing symbol information is added and set in the display data table set (S2902). As described above, by setting the changing symbol information, it is possible to suppress a problem that a symbol different from the displayed symbol is displayed when switching to the display content corresponding to the addition time.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and added to the transfer data table buffer 233e and set (S2903). Based on the data table, time data is added to the time counter 233h and set (S2904).

  When an addition command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the addition command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. Set the display data table. By configuring in this way, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined that there is no display addition command in the process of S2412 (S2412: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2417). If (S2417: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2418), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the error command process (S2418) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3001). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3002). The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3001, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3002 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined in the processing of S2417 that there is no error command (S2417: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), the simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 65 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 65 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 65A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 70, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3101). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3101: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3102 to S3104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3101: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3102), S3103 to S3104 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3103). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3103: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3104).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3201).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3201, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3202), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3103: No), the process proceeds to S3105.

  In S3105, pointer update processing is executed (S3105). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3301). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3302). As a result, if it is End information (S3302: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3303). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3303: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3305), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3306, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3302: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3106). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3106 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3108). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3108: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3109).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3109: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been performed and the confirmation display effect has been performed. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3111). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3112), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3113). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3114), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3115), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3115 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3115, and the By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is OFF instead of ON in the processing of S3109 (S3109: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3116). If the demo display flag is off (S3116: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S3117), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3118). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3119). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3120), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3121), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S3116, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3116: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3401, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3403), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3402).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3501), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3502). In the processing of S3502, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined in S3502 that the transfer process has not ended (S3502: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to S3503. Also, as a result of the processing of S3501, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3503.

  In the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3503). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3504), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3503 (S3503: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3505), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 64 to 68) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed at 81. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) (see S3401: No in FIG. 71A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3403), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3403).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3105) of the display setting process (S2303) executed previously is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3602). If it is transfer data information (S3602: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3604), and the process proceeds to S3605.

  In the process of S3602, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3602: No), the process of S3603 and S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. In the process of S3605, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3605), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3605: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3606).

  In the process of S3606, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S3606 (S3606: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to S3607. Also, as a result of the process of S3605, when the transfer instruction of image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3605: No), the process proceeds to S3607.

  In the process of S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3607). If the transfer start flag is on (S3607: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S3608), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S3603 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3607: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S3609, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609). The determination in the process of S3609 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3609 (S3609: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3609 (S3609: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3610). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3610, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3611), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information required for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 31 is generated (S3701). That is, in the process of S3701, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3702). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V-interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 63B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and is read from the character ROM 234 while drawing the image. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70A) when the above-mentioned is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the information on the various counters (special hit random number counter C1 and special hit type counter C2) acquired when the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 at the start winning prize is used as the number of held balls command. The case of inclusion is not necessarily limited to this, but information on various counters (special hit random number counter C1 and special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of winning a start by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. You may be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first start port 64a is provided in the game board 13 where a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winning to the first start port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on a winning at the first starting port 64a is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or the number of four divided areas by the number of held balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a game ball is won at the second start port 64b and the variation of the special symbol 2 is started when the normal symbol is won for a long time, the special symbol 1 is started. As in the case of the change, the case where the selected change pattern is displayed in a change manner when the start timing of the change has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol 2 based on winning for the long time and winning in the second starting port 64b is started, the third symbol display The opening display mode is displayed on the device 81, and the player has a special effect of special symbol 2 (the effect of variable display of special symbol 2 based on winning in the second start port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol). The first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the start is notified.

<About the display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 74 to 75, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and a timing chart thereof will be described.

  FIG. 74A shows a third symbol display device 81 in the case where a game ball wins the second starting port 64b opened for a long time while the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. It is the figure shown about the opening display mode displayed on. First, the timing chart will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 (a) shows that the special symbol 1 is changing when the normal symbol is won for a long time, the special symbol 2 has 0 reserved balls, and the game ball is won at the second starting port 64b. It is the figure which showed the timing chart until the special symbol 2 when the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more becomes a fluctuation start.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the special symbol 1 is variably displayed, the normal symbol starts to be hit for a long time, and when the special symbol is 0 holding balls, the game ball is placed in the second start port 64b. Is won, the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for three seconds before the variation stops on the special symbol 1 that is fluctuating. If the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or less, the same processing as that in which the special symbol 1 described later wins while the fluctuation is stopped is executed. A detailed description of this case will be described with reference to FIG.

  While the opening display mode is displayed for 3 seconds, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed in a normal size, and the main symbol of the special symbol 2 starts to be displayed in a variable manner.

  By configuring in this way, even if a game ball wins the second starting port 64b, even if the variation display of the special symbol 2 does not start until the variation of the special symbol 1 stops, the variation of the special symbol 2 The start time can be easily recognized.

  In addition, by executing the opening effect using the variation time of the special symbol 1, the variation display time of the special symbol 1 can be effectively used.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75 (b), when the normal symbol is won for a long time and a game ball is won at the second starting port 64b, the third symbol in the state where the special symbol 1 has not changed. A timing chart of the display mode displayed on the symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in a state where the variation of the special symbol 1 is stopped (the state where there is no special symbol 1 holding ball, the stop timing of the special symbol 1), a game ball is placed at the second start port 64b. When the winning display is started and the variation display of the special symbol 2 starts, the opening display mode as shown in FIG. 74 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device for 3 seconds after the variation of the special symbol 2 starts. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 74B, the special symbol 2 is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As an opening display mode, a “chance zone start” for informing the player that the change display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 64b is started per long time of the normal symbol. Characters are displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the display data table for the opening effect that is executed when a game ball is won at the second start port 64b per long time of the normal symbol in the second embodiment will be described. In this display data table, the display mode of the opening effect as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (b) is set. The opening effect is stored as moving image data, and the reproduction setting is set in this display data table. Then, it is set as an image in front of the background image. The changing special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) with respect to the control process executed by the sound lamp control process 113 described in the first embodiment. Is different. About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 77, the winning command reception process 2 (S1409) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1409). The winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is from S1484 to S1489 in contrast to the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Each process has been added. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  When the process of S1483 is executed, the process of S1484 is executed. In the processing of S1484, it is determined whether or not the winning command received when the sub long time flag 223h is on is the first winning command for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484). If it is determined that it is not the first winning command for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the first winning ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: Yes), the processing of S1485 is executed. In the process of S1485, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 is in a variable display (S1485).

  When it is determined that the special symbol 1 is stopped (S1485: No), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 is in the variable display (S1485: Yes), it is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol 1 in the change is a win (S1486). If it is determined that the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 is fluctuating is out (S1486: No), the processing of S1487 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning / failing determination result of the changing special symbol 1 is a win (S1486: Yes), this process is terminated. As described above, when the special symbol 1 being changed is a win, the jackpot game is subsequently executed, so that the opening display mode is canceled. Therefore, before the jackpot game, the display of the opening display mode indicating that the variation display of the special symbol 2 by the winning of the second starting port 64b based on the long time of the normal symbol is started is cancelled. Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem that may confuse the player.

  In the process of S1487, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds (S1487: Yes), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487: Yes), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds before the remaining, as shown in FIG. A display opening effect command for instructing to display the opening display mode is set (S1488).

  In the process of S1489, based on the change start timing of the special symbol 2, a display opening effect command for instructing to display the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (b) is set. As described above, when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b due to the long time of the normal symbol and the special symbol 2 starts to fluctuate, the special symbol 1 is fluctuating and the remaining time is 3 seconds or more. For example, the opening display mode is displayed at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 is stopped or when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds, the opening display mode is the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol 2. Is set to be displayed.

  Therefore, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing for displaying the opening display mode according to the state when the game ball is won at the second start port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to provide a smooth performance that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the present embodiment, the opening display mode is canceled when the determination result of the special symbol 1 being changed is a win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 2 started after the jackpot game is not limited. You may set so that an opening display aspect may be displayed at the timing of a fluctuation | variation start.

<Control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 79, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment is executed. In the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) is a command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S2320), compared to the control process in the first embodiment. ) Is different. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 78, the command determination process 2 (S2320) performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2320). In command determination processing 2 (FIG. 78, S2320) in the second embodiment, processes from S2414 to S2415 are added to the command determination processing (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2412, when it is determined that the display addition command has not been received (S2412: No), it is determined whether the display general opening command has been received (S2414). If it is determined that the display general map opening command is received (S2414: Yes), the general map opening process is executed (S2415). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display opening command has not been received (S2414: No), the processing of S2417 is executed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 79, a general-purpose opening process which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIGS. 78 and 2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. (S2415) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this usual figure opening process (S2415).

  In the usual opening process (FIG. 79), first, the display timing of the opening display mode set in the command is set (S2911). This display timing is set by overwriting a display data table for a general map opening set by a timing indicated by the flag, which is not shown.

  The symbol offset data is set in the display data table for the general opening (S2912). A display data table for general-purpose opening that is set by overwriting the display data table set in the display data table buffer is set (S2913).

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is won for a long time, the display of the special symbol 2 based on winning at the second start opening 64b is accompanied by a notice effect different from the normal time. The configuration in which the variable display mode is displayed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol after the long time is set by one fluctuation with a fluctuation time longer than the normal time. Even when the determination is made continuously, it is different in that it is configured to eliminate the problem that a game ball equal to or larger than the holding ball is won at the second start port 64b and becomes an overflow ball. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, its detailed configuration is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
As for the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, as compared with the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a configuration as shown in FIGS. A normal variation pattern selection table 202 d is added, and a normal status storage area 203 k is added to the RAM 203. About another structure, it is the same structure as 1st Embodiment.

  The normal variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is a selection table for selecting (determining) the variation time of the normal symbol. As shown in FIGS. 80C to 80D, this normal variation pattern selection table 202d is dedicated to the normal status value (mode 1 or mode 2) set in the normal status storage area 203k described later. The normal variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80C) and the normal variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80D) are respectively set.

  A normal status storage area 203k provided in the RAM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is a storage area for storing a normal status. As the normal status, mode 1 and mode 2 are set, and mode 1 is set at the normal time. Mode 2 is set based on the fact that the regular symbol is won for a long time. After the mode 2 is set, the mode 1 is set when the normal symbol variation is selected once. That is, the normal status is a status for making it possible to identify the fluctuation after winning for a long time.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. It differs from the control processing in the first embodiment in that the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) is changed to the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640). About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 81, the normal symbol variation start process 2 (S640) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation start process 2 (S640). In the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640) in the third embodiment, the processes of S641 to S645 are added to the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) in the first embodiment. Yes. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processes of S630, S634, and S635 are executed, the process of S641 is executed. In the process of S641, the normal symbol change time is selected based on the normal status stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S641). It is determined whether or not the normal status is mode 2 (S642). If it is determined that the normal status is mode 2 (S642: Yes), the normal status is set to mode 1 and stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S643).

  As described above, after selecting the normal symbol variation time, it is determined whether the normal status is set to mode 2, and if the normal status indicates mode 2 after a long time, the mode is Set to 1. Therefore, the first variation of the normal symbol per long time of the normal symbol is selected from the normal variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)). In this normal variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)), the variation time is set longer than that in the normal variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)). It is possible to set a long variation time for one variation later.

  The fluctuation time set in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) is set to 70 seconds when the determination result is a hit (long time, normal hit). Yes. As a result, if 4 holds are stored in the special symbol 2 and are immediately displayed in a variable manner, if the result of the determination is all out of place and the longest variation time is selected, a total variation time of 66 seconds is selected. However, since a longer variation time is selected, even if the hit per hour continues, the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is not digested, and the game ball wins the second starting port 64b. However, the malfunction which becomes an overflow ball which does not become a reservation ball can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, 70 seconds is set as the case where special symbol 2 is immediately displayed in a variable manner. However, in consideration of the fact that special symbol 1 is fluctuating, the success / failure determination result of special symbol 1 is missed. It may be configured to set to 100 seconds or more obtained by adding 30 seconds which is the longest variation time selected in the case of. By comprising in this way, when a game ball wins more to the 2nd starting port 64b, it can control becoming an overflow ball. Furthermore, since the next long hit is likely to be established after all the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 have been digested, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed to improve the probability of jackpot.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the configuration in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 won at the first starting port 64a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the color of the reserved symbol displayed when the winning ball is stored in the first starting port 64a and stored as the holding ball is made variable depending on the result of the determination. This is different from the first embodiment. Note that a detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

<Regarding period setting (setting of effect mode) in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (b), setting of each period when the game is displayed with a rainbow indicating a jackpot in the reserved symbol in the normal game period in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 82 (a), the reserved symbol is displayed in rainbow during the normal period, the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts to fluctuate in the normal period, fluctuates and stops in the preparation period, and then the jackpot game is started. 6 is a timing chart showing processing in the case.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the game ball wins the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in the normal period and becomes a holding ball, and the result of the pre-reading is regarded as a big hit. The reserved symbol is displayed in rainbow color. In this case, if the special symbol has been changed first, or if it has been held first and the one with the high priority of the change start timing is changed to a stop, it is held as a hold period. Thereafter, the timing for starting the change is reached, and when the change starts, the change starts in the normal game period as shown in FIG. Then, at the start of the change, it is determined whether the preparation period is set when the change is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped within the preparation period, the setting of the preparation period is set to be canceled at this time. As a result, if the player is informed that the jackpot game will start at the start of the change, the player will not be able to start the jackpot by setting the preparation period and changing the background. It is possible to suppress problems that you might think. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the precious hit effect from being lost by changing the background screen to the background of the preparation period during the special symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  Next, FIG. 82B is a timing chart in the case where the fluctuation starts during the preparation period, the fluctuation is displayed over the time production period, and the fluctuation stops during the time production period. The preparation period is not set to a period in which the notice display is not selected, so at the beginning of the change, the notice display that is displayed in the preparation period is not set. The notice effect is set to be displayed. Thereby, it can be made to think that it is easy to generate | occur | produce a big hit if it becomes a time effect with respect to another player. Moreover, although the player is recognized as a big hit at the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to suppress a problem that the user is dissatisfied with the fact that the notice display (special fish school) dedicated to the time effect that notifies the big hit is not displayed. .

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 83, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 as compared with the first embodiment. A notice delay flag 223β is added. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The mode B prohibition flag 223α is a flag indicating that the setting of the preparation period is prohibited. When the reserved symbol is displayed in the rainbow display color indicating that the success / failure determination of the special symbol 1 indicated by the reserved symbol is a jackpot, the change display of the special symbol 1 corresponding to the reserved symbol is stopped and displayed in the preparation period. If determined, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (FIG. 86, S1553). Although illustration is omitted, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to OFF based on the start of the big hit game.

  The advance notice flag 223β is a flag indicating that the notice display mode of the special fish school that informs the player that the game is a big hit in the time effect period is delayed until the start of the open effect of the big hit game. This advance delay flag 223β is set to ON in the process of S1734 in the effect change process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Here, when the time effect period is set, when the determination result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a big hit, it is set to ON when the remaining fluctuating time is 3 seconds or less.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice display in a state where the remaining change display is already small. Furthermore, the notice display mode of the special fish school is delayed until the start of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game has started, and in the time production period, if the jackpot game The fact that the notice display mode of the school of fish is displayed can be easily informed.

  The advance notice delay flag 223β is set to OFF in the process of S1546 of the opening process (FIG. 88, S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

<Regarding Control Processing by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 84, the command determination process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1320). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 84, S1320) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the fluctuation pattern reception process (FIG. 48, S1402) is a fluctuation pattern reception. In the process 2 (S1529), the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 84, S1530), and the processes of S1539 to S1540 are added.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (S1529), the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is different from the fluctuation pattern command reception process (FIG. 48, S1402) in the first embodiment. Since it is only changed to S1428), the illustration is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1428) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1428). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1434 to S1435 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) in the first embodiment, and the notice selection process is performed. (FIG. 86, S1550) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the advance notice selection process (S1550), which is one process in the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428), will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the notice selection processing (S1550).

  In the notice selection process (FIG. 86, S1550), first, it is determined whether the color of the reserved symbol of the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is rainbow (S1551). If it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is rainbow (S1551: Yes), it is determined whether the period during which the special symbol that starts changing is stopped is a preparation period (S1552). When it is determined that the period during which the fluctuation is stopped is the preparation period (S1552: Yes), the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (S1553). Thereafter, the process of S1554 is executed.

  In this way, if the color of the reserved symbol is a big hit (the result of lottery of the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol), the variation stop time is determined. Mode B prohibition flag 223α indicating that prohibition is set is set to ON. Therefore, before it becomes a big hit, it is changed to a background image indicating the preparation period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that it is not possible to concentrate on the variation display of the special symbol. Moreover, in the other pachinko machine 10, since it is set in the preparation period, in the pachinko machine 10 where the player is playing, it can be recognized that the determination result is a big hit by not being set in the preparation period, You can play with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1551, when it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is not rainbow (S1551: No), in the process of S1552, when it is determined that the period at which the change is stopped is not the preparation period (S1552: No), The process of S1554 is executed.

  In the process of S1554, a notice effect display is selected from the notice selection table A, and the selected notice effect display is set (S1554). Thereafter, a notice effect is selected and set from the touch charge notice selection table (S1555).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the winning command reception process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 3 (S1530). In the prize command reception process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) in the fourth embodiment, processes from S1534 to S1538 are added to the prize command reception process (FIG. 53, S1409) in the first embodiment. . In addition, since each process from S1531 to S1533 in the fourth embodiment is the same as each process from S1481 to S1483 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the process of S1553 is executed, the process of S1534 is executed. In the processing of S1534, it is determined whether or not a special symbol 1 winning command has been received (S1534). If a special command 1 winning command has been received (S1534: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received winning command is a winning command indicating that the determination result is a big hit (S1535). When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit (S1535: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1536).

  It is determined whether the value of the obtained effect counter 223k is “0 to 30” (S1537). If it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223k is any one of “0-30” (S1537: Yes), the color of the corresponding reserved symbol is set to rainbow (S1538).

  Here, as for the color of the reserved symbol, in the reserved number display update process (FIG. 46, S1306), a display holding command indicating the color and number of the reserved symbol is generated and output to the display control device 114. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the opening process (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S1540).

  In the opening process (FIG. 88, S1540), first, it is determined whether or not it is 1 minute or less until the time effect start period (S1541). If it is determined that it is 1 minute or less until the start period of the time effect (S1541: Yes), the volume in the jackpot game is set to a low volume (S1542).

  In this way, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is received, the volume of the jackpot game is set to be small if it is 1 minute or less before the time effect period is set. However, it can be difficult to understand from other players. As will be described later, when the time effect period is set thereafter, the volume of the jackpot game is set to the normal volume. Therefore, other players can make it seem as if the jackpot game has started due to the time production period, and make the player think that the jackpot game is likely to start during the time production period. Can do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1541, when it is determined that there is a time longer than 1 minute until the time effect period (S1541: No), the process of S1543 is executed. In the process of S1543, it is determined whether the notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543). When it is determined that the advance delay flag 223β is on (S1543: Yes), a display advance notice display command for setting the advance notice display of the special fish school is set (S1544). A display opening command is set (S1545). The advance delay flag 223β is set to OFF (S1546). On the other hand, in the process of S1543, when it is determined that the advance notice delay flag 223β is off (S1543: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330). In the synchronous effect management process 2 (FIG. 89, S1330) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1730 and S1731 are added to the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 56, S1314) in the first embodiment. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  After executing the process of S1707, the effect changing process 2 (S1730) is executed. Details of the effect changing process 2 (S1730) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect changing process 2 (S1730).

  In the effect changing process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S1731). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the determination result of the changing special symbol is a jackpot (S1732). If it is determined that the determination result is a big hit (S1732: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733).

  When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733: Yes), the notice delay flag 223β is set to ON (S1734). Thereafter, this process is terminated. on the other hand. In the process of S1733, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 3 seconds (S1733: No), a display notice display command for displaying the special fish school display is set (S1735).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1731 that the special symbol is stopped (S1731: No), or if it is determined in S1732 that the determination result is not correct (S1732: No), S1736. Execute the process. In the processing of S1736, it is determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S1736). If it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S1736: Yes), the volume setting for the jackpot game is set to the normal volume (S1737). Thereafter, the process of S1735 is executed.

  As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played when the time effect period is set, the volume setting is set to the normal volume, so the start of the jackpot game is one minute of the setting of the time effect period. If it is within the previous volume, the volume is set to a low volume, so the volume will be returned to the normal volume, and other players started the big hit game based on the setting of the time performance period Can make you think. Therefore, when the time effect period is set, other players can be made to think that the jackpot game is easily started, and the expectation for the jackpot for the time effect period can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game in the hope that a time production period will be set, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1736 that the game is not a big hit game (S1736: No), this process ends.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, based on the fixed time, the display mode of each mode displayed in the fixed time of each background mode is set, and then the SW valid time has passed, The case where the display mode indicated by the addition command corresponding to the set background mode has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the display mode of each background mode displayed in a fixed time is set based on the number of reserved items, and then set in an additional time until the fixed time elapses. This is different from the first embodiment in that the table mode corresponding to each background mode is set. Note that illustration and description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment is omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the contents of the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are changed. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 92, in the fifth embodiment, the addition command is not set when the addition time is 0 second as compared to the first embodiment. Further, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the variation time, SW valid time, fixed time, and addition time of the super reach jackpot variation patterns B1 and B2 and the super reach loss variation patterns B1 and B2 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. In addition, an addition data transfer flag 233m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  This addition data transfer flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the transfer of display data corresponding to the addition time has started. The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to ON in the processing of S2432 of the addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Further, it is set to OFF in the process of S2441.

<Regarding Control Processing by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96.

  With reference to FIG. 94, the command determination process 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1340). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 94, S1340) in the fifth embodiment, the process of S1560 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  After the process of S1414 is executed, the process of S1560 is executed. In the process of S1560, a display addition command for notifying the display controller 114 of information indicated by the received addition command is set (S1560).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the variable display setting process 2 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1350). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 95, S1350) in the fifth embodiment, the processes from S1510 to S1513 are deleted from the variable display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312) in the first embodiment. . For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1360). The frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) in the fifth embodiment is different from the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1920 is S1940. The processing has been changed.

  After the process of S1919 is executed, the process of S1940 is executed. In the process of S1940, a display background command indicating the set background mode is set (S1940).

<Control Processing by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99, the command determination process 3 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2320). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 97, S2320) in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command process (FIG. 65, S2405) is different from the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. In the processing (FIG. 98, S2420), the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413) is changed to the addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430). For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2420) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command process 2 (S2420). The variation pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 98, S2420) in the fifth embodiment is different from the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 65 (a), S2405) in the first embodiment in that the processing of S2503 and S2504 is S2510, respectively. The processing is changed to each processing of S2511. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the processing of S2510, the display data table corresponding to the fixed time of each background mode is determined based on the number of reservations and set in the display data table buffer (S2510). The variable display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area is set to active (S2511).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the addition command process 2 (S2430).

  In addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430), first, it is determined whether or not the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431). If it is determined that the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435: Yes), the determined display data table is set in the display data table buffer (S2436). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (S2437). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2438). Time data is set in the time counter based on the data table (S2439). The pointer is initialized (S2440). The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to OFF (S2441).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2431 that the addition data transfer flag 233m is off (S2341: No), the display data table is determined based on the received command and the variation pattern, and the symbol information is set. (S2432). The transfer of the moving image data set in the display data table is started (S2433). The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to ON (S2434).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fixed time variable display is performed by adding time until the fixed time elapses after the data of the variable display is set for each background mode based on the number of holds. Since the variable display data to be set is set, the amount of data set at the start of the variable display can be reduced. Therefore, the control load at the start of fluctuation is reduced, and problems such as processing failures can be suppressed.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an RTC 292 that operates with a built-in battery, measures the time, and produces an effect of a variable display selected for each time based on the measured data. The case where it is configured to be different has been described. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured such that the power supplied from the pachinko machine 10 is also input to the RTC 292. When the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the power is supplied to the RTC 292. It was configured as follows. Further, the configuration switch 291 is configured to be rotationally driven by a motor, and is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration can be switched by control of the pachinko machine 10.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 100 to 101, an electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RTC 292 connected to the audio lamp control device 113. A voltage of 5 V is connected to the RTC 292 from the power supply device 290 via the diode D1. A 5V battery 292a included in the RTC 292 is also connected to the power input unit via a predetermined resistor. With this configuration, when voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115, the battery is supplied to the RTC 292 from the pachinko machine 10 and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Switching is performed so that necessary power is supplied from 292a.

  Therefore, the operation time of the battery 292a can be reduced, and the power consumption of the battery 292a can be further suppressed. Therefore, the RTC 292 can be operated over a long period of time.

  Next, as illustrated in FIG. 100B, the setting switch 291 is configured to be rotatable by a switching motor 293 configured by a stepping motor. With this configuration, when the power of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, the setting switch 291 can be automatically changed to a setting that prohibits the use of the RTC 292. Therefore, it is possible to save the time and effort required for setting at the amusement store, and to reduce maintenance work.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the time setting process 2 (S1230) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230).

  In the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230), first, it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3 (S1221). If the setting switch 291 is set to 1 or 3, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1222). It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (in this embodiment, within 6 years from a predetermined date).

  If it is determined that the acquired time data is within the time limit (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is not within the deadline data, that is, six years or more have passed (S1223: No), the operation of the switching motor 293 is performed so that the setting switch 291 becomes 2. The setting is made (S1226). Here, specifically, the setting switch 291 is set so that the setting is switched one by one every time it is rotated 90 degrees. Therefore, when switching from setting 1 to setting 2, the setting switch 291 is rotated 90 degrees forward. The stepping motor which is the switching motor 293 is operated. In order to switch from setting 3 to setting 2, the stepping motor which is the switching motor 293 is operated so as to rotate forward 270 degrees.

  As a result, setting 2 is set so that the function of the RTC 292 is disabled as shown in FIG. 26B and the number of times of change display is switched to display. Therefore, when 6 years, which is the expiry date of the battery 292a of the RTC 292, has passed, the function of the RTC 292 is automatically set to be invalid so that the time effect period and the like can be set in a state where the timing data is not accurate due to power shortage. It is possible to suppress problems that are executed and cannot synchronize with other pachinko machines 10.

  In the present embodiment, the setting 1 or the setting 3 is configured to automatically set the setting 2 by passing the term data. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When the setting 2 is the setting 3, the switching motor 293 may be operated to switch to the setting 4 respectively. With this configuration, it is possible to configure only the function of the RTC 292 without changing the display setting of the total number of changes.

  In addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the setting switch is changed on the hall side, a retry is made to match the correct setting (matching the setting using the RTC 292 after 6 years have passed). A process for causing the switching motor 293 to execute the operation may be added. In this case, it may be configured to operate immediately after monitoring for every predetermined time (for example, every hour) or when the setting is changed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the expiration date of the RTC 292 has passed on the hall side as well.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine the expiration date data on the date when six years have passed from the preset setting period, but not limited thereto, a determination means for determining the voltage value of the battery 292a is provided, The setting switch 291 may be automatically switched when the voltage value is equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or lower). With this configuration, the state of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 can be further determined and switched.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 112. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a configuration in which the player can change the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the touch switch 290 provided on the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 provided in the game board 60 is provided with a board-side touch sensor 294 constituted by an optical touch sensor. The board side touch sensor 294 is provided above the third symbol display device 81, and the board side left touch sensor 294 a provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the board side right provided on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. And a touch sensor 294b.

  This board side touch sensor 294 turns on the board side left touch sensor 294a when the player holds his hand over the left side of the main display area Ds of the 3rd symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, and the 3rd symbol display. When the hand is held over the right side of the main display area Dm of the apparatus, the panel-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. As will be described in detail later, the board-side touch sensor 294 brings the hand close to the display mode of the cards and the like displayed on the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 so as to point with a finger or the like through the glass unit 16. You can choose. In addition, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the user holds his hand over the glass unit 16 and reacts either the panel side left touch sensor 294a or the panel side right touch sensor 294b of the panel side touch sensor 294 to turn on. An effect of moving a school of fish from right to left is performed.

<About the display effect using the touch sensor in the seventh embodiment>
A display effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 105.

  With reference to FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c), a fish school charge notice using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 will be described. Normally, when the main symbol is in the reach display mode, the fish school notice display mode in which a school of fish (a school of fish) swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in FIG. As shown in the selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A), this is a notice display mode that can be easily selected when the result of the determination is a big hit. Here, this school of fish charge notice is also configured to be more easily selected when the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit than when it is out of place. Although illustration is omitted, the fish school charge notice effect may be set to be selected by replacing the fish school notice with the school fish charge notice in the notice selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A).

  When a fish school charge notice is selected as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the main symbol of the changing special symbol 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the text “Collect fish with the frame touch sensor! Reach with 5 or more!” Is displayed, and the player touches the frame touch sensor 290 to turn it on to collect the fish. Then, when the number becomes 5 or more, a character for informing that the reach is reached is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 290 of the frame, a display mode in which fishes gather at the right end of the third symbol display device 81 based on the held time is displayed. . When the number of fish is 5 or more, the main symbol is displayed in a reach display mode. In this state, when a hand is placed on the board side touch sensor 294 (either the board side left touch sensor 294a or the board side right touch sensor 294b) to turn it on, a group of fish gathered as shown in FIG. The display is variably displayed so as to swim from the right to the left of the 3 symbol display device 81.

  In this embodiment, when the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, the school of fish that has gathered is displayed to change from right to left. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. It is good also as a structure which acquires the value of the production counter 223k based on this, performs a decision | availability determination, and variably displays the school of fish from the right of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, when winning. In this case, if the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol that is changing is a win, it is configured so that it is easier to determine that it is a hit than a miss, so that the school of fish can be displayed in a variable manner, so that the expectation for the jackpot The player can be notified.

  Also, the player can move the school of fish from the right to the left with his / her hand on the third symbol display device 81 so that the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. Based on the movement of the hand, you can make it appear as if the school of fish fluctuated. In addition, by executing a lottery to determine whether the school of fish is variably displayed each time the board-side touch sensor 290 is turned on, the player moves his hand many times to turn on the board-side touch sensor 294, so that multiple After being turned on once, the lottery is won and the school of fish fluctuates and displays, so that the player can be surprised.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a display mode of a card notice, which is a notice effect using the touch sensor 290 on the frame side and the touch sensor on the board side, will be described. In FIG. 105 (a), the card advance notice is selected and the changing special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81. Two cards are displayed on the left and right, and a triangular cursor is displayed below one of the cards. In addition, a message “Move the cursor with your finger and select a card!” Is displayed, and a notification is issued to urge the player to move the cursor with his finger. Here, the card A displayed in FIG. 105 (a) is arranged below the board-side left touch sensor 294a, and the card B is arranged below the board-side right touch sensor 294b.

  Thus, when the card A is pointed through the glass unit 16, the board-side left touch sensor 294a is turned on and the cursor moves below the card A. on the other hand. When the card B is pointed through the glass unit 16, display control is performed so that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on and the cursor moves below the card B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters “determined by the frame side touch sensor”, and by turning on the frame side touch sensor 290 for the selected card. The card is determined, and as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the selected card is turned over, and a message written on the card is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 105 (b), the character “Leach!” Is displayed to notify that the changing special symbol is in the reach display mode.

  This notification content is set in multiple numbers. For example, it is set to be easy to select when it is a “hit” or “hit” to notify that the determination result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a big hit. A character such as “Intense heat !!” is displayed to inform the player that the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high. This character is selected in advance when the card notice is selected, and the same notice display mode is displayed regardless of whether the card A or card B is selected. If the card selection is not performed by the player in the card notice, the card notice is not displayed and the card notice display is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the card content is not displayed when the card notice is not selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the card on which the cursor is positioned is automatically displayed to the player after a predetermined time has elapsed. You may comprise so that it may be displayed.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a panel-side touch sensor 294 that is electrically connected to an input / output port of the sound lamp control device 113 is added, and a frame-side time counter is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. 223γ and a board side time counter 223δ are respectively added. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the board-side touch sensor 294 is provided with transmissive sensors on the left and right of the center frame 86 of the variable display unit 80 toward the glass unit 16. The panel-side touch sensor 294 includes a panel-side left touch sensor 294a disposed on the upper left side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and a board-side right sensor disposed on the upper right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. And a touch sensor 294b. When the panel side touch sensor 294 is placed over the left side portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, the panel side left touch sensor 294a is turned on and the hand is held over the right side part of the display area. The panel-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. Further, the board-side left touch sensor 294a and the board-side right touch sensor 294b are each turned on when a hand is held over the central portion of the display area.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, the frame side time counter 223γ of the RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is a counter for measuring the time when the frame side touch sensor 290 is turned on. is there. This frame side time counter 223γ is incremented by one by the process of S1967 of the sensor execution process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The board side time counter 223δ is a counter for measuring the time when the board side touch sensor 294 is turned on. This board-side time counter 223δ is incremented by 1 by the process of S1974 of the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment.

<Regarding Control Processing by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  With reference to FIG. 108, the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1370). The frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) in the seventh embodiment is a sensor input process (FIG. 60) compared to the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. , S1905) is changed to sensor input processing 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), and special operation processing (FIG. 112, S1960) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, referring to FIG. 109, it is a process in the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. A certain sensor input process 2 (S1950) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process 2 (S1950).

  In the sensor input process 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is larger than 0 (S1951). If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 0 (S1951: No), it is determined whether the notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the panel side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952). ). When it is determined that the notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952: Yes), the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board set to the notice effect is set. The sensor effective time of the side touch sensor 294 is set in the sensor effective time counter 223r (S1953). On the other hand, when it is determined that the notice effect display using the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board-side touch sensor 294 is not set (S1952: No), this process ends. In the process of S1951, when it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1951: Yes), the sensor effect process is executed (S1954).

  Next, details of the sensor effect process (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the sensor effect process (S1954).

  In the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954), first, is the effective time of the touch sensor 290 on the frame side, that is, is the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side zero? It is determined (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the frame-side touch sensor 290 is 0 (S1961: No), the process of S1969 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the frame-side touch sensor 290 is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), the sensor effective time counter corresponding to the frame-side touch sensor 290 is determined. 223r is subtracted and updated (S1962). Here, in the present embodiment, 1 is subtracted from the time corresponding to the elapsed time.

  It is determined whether or not the frame side touch sensor 290 is ON (S1963). If it is determined that the frame-side touch sensor 290 is on (S1963: Yes), it is determined whether the selected (set) notice effect is a card notice effect (S1964). On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is off (S1963: No), the process of S1969 is executed. If it is determined that the card notice effect is present (S1964: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1966).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1964, when it is determined that the selected notice effect is not the card notice effect (S1964: No), 1 is added to the frame side time counter 223γ (S1967). A display notice display command for display (shown) corresponding to the value of the frame side time counter 223γ is set (S1968). Here, when the display control display device 114 receives this display notice display command for display, a display data table for notice corresponding to the value of the frame side time counter 223γ indicated by the display notice display command for display is set. For example, when the fish charge notice shown in FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c) is selected, display data for displaying fish up to the upper limit of the number of fish preset in the fish charge notice. A table is set up. For example, when the fish charge notice that the upper limit of the number of fish is set to 3 is selected, every time the value of the frame side time counter 223r is increased by 1 second, the number of fish is incremented by 1 and displayed. When the upper limit value is three, a display data table that maintains the number is set.

  In the process of S1969, it is determined whether the board-side touch sensor 294 is valid or not, that is, whether the sensor valid-time counter 223r corresponding to the board-side touch sensor 294 is greater than 0 (S1969). If it is determined that the board side touch sensor 294 is not valid (S1969: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the valid time of the board side touch sensor 294 is in effect (S1969: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the board side touch sensor 294 is subtracted and updated (S1970). It is determined whether the panel side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971). If it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is off (S1971: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971: Yes), it is determined whether the selected notice effect is a card notice effect (S1972). If it is determined that the card notice effect has been selected (S1972: Yes), a sensor selection process is executed (S1973). The sensor selection process (S1973) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 111, but a process for selecting a card is executed in the card notice effect.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1972 that the card notice effect is not selected (S1972: No), the board side time counter 223δ is incremented by 1 (S1974). A display notice display command for display corresponding to the value of the board side time counter 223δ (indicating the value of the board side time counter 223δ) is set. Here, the value of the board side time counter 223δ is reset to 0, which is the initial value, based on the setting of the display notice display command for display. When the display control display device 114 receives the display notice display command for display, the display control device 114 is set to move and display the fish school from the left to the right of the display area (S1975).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the sensor selection process (S1973) in the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the sensor selection process (S1973).

  In the sensor selection process (FIG. 111, S1973), first, it is determined whether the board-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981). If it is determined that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the right side is set (S1982). On the other hand, in the process of S1981, when it is determined that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is off (S1981: No), it is determined whether the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983). If it is determined that the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the left side is set (S1984). On the other hand, in the process of S1983, when it is determined that the board-side left touch sensor 294a is off (S1983: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the special operation process (S1960) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this special operation processing (S1960). The special operation process (FIG. 112, S1960) in the seventh embodiment is the same as the processes in S1907 to S1913, S1916 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. Since it is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to cause the player to perform an operation and to suppress boredom by executing an effect using a plurality of touch sensors. In addition, by configuring the touch sensor, the player can operate the display screen by pointing his / her finger, and the feeling of participating in the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the structure of said each embodiment may be implemented combining all or one part.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information necessary to execute a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can enter the game ball and the game ball entering the entrance; On the basis of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, a determination unit for determining whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied, and a storage unit for storing the lottery information until at least the lottery condition is satisfied. A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored in the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance, and a game ball than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, and when the first condition is satisfied, the entry assisting means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, the first opening And variable control means for changing at least the second opening which is variable from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player, and the variable control means. 2 When the game ball enters the entrance and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while being changed to open, the number of the lottery information is given to the player. Display control means capable of causing the display means to display the identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entrance opening while being changed to open. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the lottery information acquisition means obtains the lottery information necessary to execute the game lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The entry assisting means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. A first opening that is variable from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied, and a ball that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening when the second condition is satisfied. The assisting means is changed by the variable control means from the second state to the first state. When the game ball enters the entrance and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, the number of lottery information is given to the player. While being changed to the first opening, an identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entrance is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Accordingly, it is possible to easily notify the player of the number of game balls that have entered the entrance at the second opening and the lottery information is stored. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the second opening has been performed, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine A1, to detect at least the first condition and the second condition based on detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball and the detection means determining the passage of the game ball. Discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring the discriminating information, discriminating means for discriminating whether the discriminating information acquired by the acquiring means is based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, or whether the first opening is established, Determination information storage means for storing the determination information acquired at least until the determination condition is satisfied, and determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means in advance before the determination condition is satisfied If the advance determination means determines that the second release is established, the information is sent to the player to change the entry assisting means to the second release. Gaming machine A2, wherein also those having a notification means for notifying before.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. Based on the determination of the passage of the game ball by the detection means, the determination information for determining whether or not at least the first condition and the second condition are satisfied is acquired by the determination information acquisition means. Based on the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, the determination means determines whether the first opening or the second opening is satisfied. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the discrimination information storage unit until at least a discrimination condition is satisfied. Prior to the determination condition being established, the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined in advance by the prior determination means. When it is determined by the prior determination means that the second opening has been established, the information is notified to the player by the notification means before the entry assisting means is changed to the second opening. Thereby, it can know in advance about the 2nd opening and can prepare for the 2nd opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the second opening can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the informing means is based on the fact that the prior opening means has determined that the second opening has been established, until the entry assisting means is in the first state. The first notification mode indicating the first state is notified, and the second notification mode indicating the change to the second state is notified based on the change to the second state. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the second opening has been determined by the prior determination means, the first notification mode indicating the first state is notified by the notification means until the period when the entrance assisting means is in the first state. The Further, based on the change to the second state, the notification means notifies the second notification mode indicating that the state has been changed to the second state. Thus, the player can recognize the state of the entrance assisting means by notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player misses that the entrance / exit assisting means is in the second open state.

  In the gaming machine A3, as the first notification mode, the notification unit displays, on the display unit, a first notification symbol indicating that the entry assisting unit is in the first state, and as the second notification mode, The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the display means displays a second notification symbol indicating that the entry assisting means is in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a first notification mode, a first notification symbol indicating that the entrance assisting unit is in the first state is displayed on the display unit by the notification unit. Further, as the second notification mode, a second notification pattern indicating that the entering assistance means is in the second state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. Thereby, the player can recognize by the display means whether the entering assistance means is in the first state or the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be obtained from the display means and the game can be easily performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, based on the fact that the pre-discriminating means determines the establishment of the second release, before the information is notified by the notifying means, the notifying means A gaming machine A5 having a prior notification means for notifying a prior notification mode for notifying that notification is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, based on the fact that the establishment of the second opening is determined by the prior determination means, the information is notified by the notification means Since the prior notification mode for notifying that the notification is performed by the notification means is previously notified by the prior notification means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player misses the fact that the second opening has been made. .

<Feature B group>
On the basis of the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to win, a display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol Time counting in a gaming machine having dynamic display mode determination means to be determined and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the winning / failure determination result being winning. The time display means capable of determining the time measurement data by the time measurement means, and the dynamic display mode determination means when the time measurement data determination means determines that the set value is predetermined. The determined dynamic display mode is different from other periods, the specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined, and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period, respectively. The dynamic display mode of the dynamic display mode that can be determined outside the specific period by the dynamic display mode determination unit is set to be shorter than the preparation period. A gaming machine B1 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. The display unit displays an identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discriminating means. When it is determined that the preset value is determined by the time data determination unit, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is determined to be different from other periods. A specific period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are respectively set by the production period setting means. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode that can be determined outside the specific period by the dynamic display mode determination means is set to be shorter than the preparation period. Thereby, the dynamic display mode started from before the preparation period can be ended in the preparation period before the specific period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific period can be started by preparing for the specific period.

  In the gaming machine B1, the timing means counts the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the timing data discriminating means is the time data by the timing means being turned on to the gaming machine. When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since then, it is determined that the set value is the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time measuring means measures the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine by the time measuring means. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed since the time-measurement data by the time-measurement means was turned on to the gaming machine, it is determined by the time-data determination process that it is a set value. Thereby, by turning on power to a plurality of gaming machines at the same time, the gaming machines can measure the same elapsed time. Therefore, the specific period can be set in synchronization with a plurality of the same gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that a dynamic display mode synchronized between gaming machines can be determined.

  In the gaming machine B1, the time measuring means is configured to be able to time the time even when the gaming machine is not powered on, and the time data discriminating means is the time counting acquired from the time measuring means. A gaming machine B3, wherein when it is determined that the data is a preset set time, the set value is determined.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, even when the gaming machine is not powered on, the time is measured by the time measuring means. When it is determined that the time data acquired from the time measuring means is a preset time, the time data determining means determines that it is a set value. Thus, by setting the same time as a set value between the same gaming machines in advance, the gaming machines can be set in a specific period in synchronization with each other. Therefore, there is an effect that a dynamic display mode synchronized between gaming machines can be determined.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of whether or not the result is determined by the result determination means, and the notice effect executing means A preliminary announcement effect to be executed based on the determination result, a preliminary announcement determination unit for determining from among the plurality of preliminary announcement effects, and the preparation period based on the preparation period being set by the period setting unit And a prohibiting means for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect during the game machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the notice effect execution means is executed by the notice effect execution means based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is determined. The notice effect to be executed by the notice effect executing means is determined by the notice effect determining means from the plurality of notice effects based on the determination result. Based on the setting of the preparation period by the period setting means, the prohibition means is set so as to prohibit the notice effect from being executed during the preparation period. Thereby, during the preparation period, the notice effect is not determined, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect different from the normal time. Therefore, in the preparation period before the transition to the specific period, the player can be provided with an effect different from the normal time, and the player can easily recognize that the specific period is about to start. There is.

  In the gaming machine B4, at least a specific notice effect is set in the plurality of notice effects, and the notice effect determining unit is more likely to determine the specific notice effect in the specific period than outside the specific period. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects can be obtained. That is, at least a specific notice effect is set in the plurality of notice effects. In the specific period, the specific notice effect is more easily determined by the notice effect determining means than outside the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player that the specific period is due to the specific notice effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a gaming machine B6 is characterized in that a plurality of setting values are set in advance.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B5, since a plurality of set values are set in advance, there is an effect that the specific period can be set a plurality of times.

<Feature C group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a bonus determination means for performing the hit / no-go determination, and a bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first hit is granted when the hit determination means determines that the hit is true. A hit type determining means for determining at least a second hit, a display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the validity determination means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having dynamic display mode determining means for determining and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the success / failure determination is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a win A timing means capable of timing, a timing data discriminating means for discriminating timing data by the timing means, and a preset value determined by the timing data discrimination In this case, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is a specific period in which a dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined, and preparation for starting the specific period before the specific period Period setting means for setting each period, and dynamic display determination means for determining whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means when the specific period is set by the period setting means And a second hit discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the dynamic determination result is the second hit based on the fact that the dynamic display discrimination means determines that the dynamic display is performed. And when the second hit determining means determines that the second hit, the player is notified of the notification mode indicating the second hit before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. Notification means Gaming machine C1, characterized in that those having.

  According to the gaming machine C1, whether or not the game is determined is determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the start condition. When it is determined that the winning / nothing determination means is a winning, the first winning and the second winning in which a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first winning is determined by the winning type determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure by the determination unit is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. When the determination result is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discrimination means. A specification in which a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined to be different from other periods when it is determined that the preset value is determined by the timing data determination. The period setting means sets a period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period. When the specific period is set by the period setting unit, the dynamic display determination unit determines whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display unit. Based on the fact that the dynamic display determining means determines that the dynamic display is performed, the second hit determining means determines whether the dynamic determination result determination result is the second hit. . When the second hit determining means determines that it is the second hit, the notifying means notifies the player of the second hit state before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. The Thus, by setting the specific period, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is in the second win earlier than usual. Therefore, the specific period can be made a period more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible for the player to play with the expectation that the specific period is set, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine C1, the notifying means displays a symbol indicating that the second hit is on the display means, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, since the symbol indicating the second hit is displayed on the display means by the notifying means, it is easier for the player to understand that the second hit. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a common hit identification symbol indicating that the identification symbol is the first hit or the second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating the second hit are set. When the common winning identification symbol is stopped and displayed, a determination notification mode indicating the winning type determined by the winning type determining means is notified during the bonus game executed thereafter. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. In other words, at least the common hit identification symbol indicating the first hit or the second hit and the dedicated hit identification symbol indicating the second hit are set in the identification symbol. When the common winning identification symbol is stopped and displayed, a determination notification mode indicating the winning type determined by the winning type determining means is notified during the bonus game executed thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to play a game while expecting the second hit even during the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

<Feature D group>
Main control means for executing control of the game, slave control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and display means, wherein the main control means Based on the establishment, a dynamic display time for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying on the display means a correct / invalid determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination and an identification symbol indicating the correct / incorrect determination result by the correct / incorrect determination means. Dynamic display time determining means for determining, and dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on being stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that the winner determination result by the winner determination means is a win, Secondary control means Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and display control means for displaying the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit In the gaming machine having the above, the slave control means includes: an operation means operable by the player; an operation determination means for determining whether the operation means has been operated; and the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination means. And switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operating unit has been operated. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is prohibited from switching to another dynamic display mode and the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit. Switching prohibited The dynamic display information signal includes a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means in a first time and a second time added to the first time. The dynamic display mode determination means includes a first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and a second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time. And the switchable period is set within a period during which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D1, game control is executed by the main control means. Based on the control signal from the main control means, control of the game is executed by the sub control means. In the main control means, the determination as to whether the start condition is satisfied is executed by the determination means. The dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display time determination unit. A dynamic display information generating unit generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control unit of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining unit. On the basis of the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that it is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. In the sub control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is displayed by the display control unit. It is determined by the operation determining means whether the operating means operable by the player has been operated. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination unit, the switching unit switches the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on determining that the operation unit has been operated. . The dynamic display mode determining unit determines the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit and the switching prohibition period during which switching to another dynamic display mode is prohibited. Each display mode is set. The dynamic display information signal is a signal indicating the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means separately for the first time and the second time added to the first time. Is configured. In the dynamic display mode determination means, the first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and the second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time are respectively determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. . The switchable period is set within the period in which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the first dynamic display mode set within the switchable period is configured to be set separately, there is an effect that the control load for setting the first dynamic display mode to be switched can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, the switching unit switches between a plurality of preset setting modes based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determining unit, and corresponds to the switched setting mode. The dynamic display mode determining unit is configured to switch to the setting mode switched by the switching unit as the first dynamic display mode based on the first time. A corresponding dynamic display mode is determined, and the second dynamic display mode is determined based on the set setting mode and the second time based on the end of the switchable period. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D2, a plurality of preset setting modes are switched based on the fact that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, and a dynamic display mode corresponding to the switched setting mode The process of switching to is executed by the switching means. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the setting mode switched by the switching unit as the first dynamic display mode based on the first time, and the switchable period has ended. Based on the set setting mode and the second time, the second dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the control load for setting the second dynamic display mode at the start of fluctuation.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the switching means switches the setting modes in order in a predetermined order based on the operation determining means being operated by the operation determining means. Machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the setting mode is sequentially switched in a predetermined order by the switching unit based on the operation unit being operated by the operation determining unit. There is an effect that it can be easily understood which setting mode is switched next by the player's operation.

<Feature E group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of effects determination means for performing the determination of success / failure, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the effect determination means, and an effect executed by the effect execution means. In a gaming machine having an effect determining means determined from an effect and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a win. While an effect is being executed by the effect executing means, a plurality of notice effects that are executed by the notice effect executing means and a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means. A notice effect determining means determined from the notice effect, a first operation means operable by the player, a second operation means different from the first operation means, and the first operation hand And an operation determining means for determining that the second operating means has been operated, and the plurality of notice effects are based on operations by the first operating means and the second operating means, An operation notice effect that changes the content of the notice effect is included, and the operation notice effect includes at least a first period during which the operation by the first operation means can be performed. During the first period, A gaming machine E1 comprising invalidating means for invalidating operation by the second operating means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect based on the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. An effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the effect determining means from a plurality of effects. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, the notice effect executing means is executed by the notice effect executing means based on the result of the success / failure determination by the effect determination means. The notice effect executed by the notice effect executing means is determined by the notice effect determining means from the plurality of notice effects. The operation determining means determines that the first operating means operable by the player and the second operating means different from the first operating means are operated. The plurality of notice effects include an operation notice effect in which the content of the notice effect changes based on operations by the first operation means and the second operation means. In the operation advance notice effect, at least a first period during which the operation by the first operation means is possible is set, and during the first period, the operation by the second operation means is invalidated by the invalidation means. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the correct operation has not been performed by setting the operation to be invalid. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first operating means has a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player, and the second operating means can detect that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to the body. A game that is arranged at a position where the player can detect the player by pressing the pressing unit of the first operation means. Machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first operation means is provided with a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player in the first operation portion. In addition, a detection unit capable of detecting that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to the player is provided in the second operation unit. When the player presses the pressing portion of the first operation means, the second operation means is arranged at a position where the player can be detected by the detection portion. Thereby, it is possible to detect both the first operating means and the second operating means, and it is possible to cause the player to perform an effect on the condition that an effect in which both are detected is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easier for a player to play.

  In the gaming machine E2, in the operation advance notice effect, a specification in which the content of the advance notice effect changes based on the fact that the operation determining means determines that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected for a predetermined time or more. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that a notice effect is included.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the content of the notice effect changes based on the fact that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected that the detection is detected for a predetermined time or more. Since the specific notice effect is included in the operation notice effect, the player can provide a novel effect, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the operation advance notice effect does not teach the instruction advance notice effect in which the teach effect that teaches the operation timing of the first operation means is executed and the operation timing of the first operation means. A gaming machine E4 including at least a non-teaching notice effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the teaching advance notice effect in which the teaching effect that teaches the operation timing of the first operation means is executed and the operation timing of the first operation means are Since the non-teaching notice effect that is not taught is included in at least the operation notice effect, the more the game is played, the easier it is to display the non-teaching notice effect, and the player can play more games. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature F group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, a time measurement means capable of timing even when power is not supplied, and a time data acquisition means for acquiring time measurement data from the time measurement means, Based on the timing data acquired by the timing data acquisition means, the timing control means for executing a control process related to a predetermined game, and the timing data acquisition means When it is determined that the operation period has elapsed by the operation period determination means for determining whether or not the operation period set in a period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed from the obtained data, and the operation period determination means And a prohibition setting means for prohibiting the control processing by the timekeeping control means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period of time, and time is measured by the time measuring means even when power is not supplied. Timing data is acquired from the timing means by the timing data acquisition means. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. The operating period determining unit determines whether or not the operating period set in a period shorter than the predetermined period than the acquired data acquired by the time data acquiring unit has elapsed. When it is determined by the operating period determining means that the operating period has elapsed, the control processing by the time measuring control means is prohibited by the prohibition setting means. As a result, the control process can be set to be prohibited by the timing control unit before the period during which the power source unit of the timing unit cannot supply power has elapsed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that incorrect control is executed based on inaccurate timing information due to power shortage.

  In the gaming machine F1, the timing means is configured to be able to count the date and time, and the operation period is set to a date and time set in a period equal to or less than the predetermined period from the time when the gaming machine was manufactured. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the date and time is counted by the timing means. The operation period is set at a date and time set in a period equal to or less than a predetermined period from the time when the gaming machine is manufactured. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a malfunction due to the elapse of a predetermined period.

<Feature G group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, a time measurement means capable of timing even when power is not supplied, and a time data acquisition means for acquiring time measurement data from the time measurement means, Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, time control means for executing control processing relating to a predetermined game, and the power supply means are supplied to the time measurement means. A power source discriminating unit for discriminating information based on the voltage value, and when the voltage value output from the power source unit by the power source discriminating unit is determined to be less than or equal to a predetermined set value, A gaming machine G1 having a prohibiting means for prohibiting

  According to the gaming machine G1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period of time, and time is measured by the time measuring means even when power is not supplied. Timing data is acquired from the timing means by the timing data acquisition means. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. Information based on the voltage value supplied from the power supply means to the time measuring means is determined by the power supply determination means. When it is determined by the power supply determination means that the voltage value output from the power supply means is equal to or less than a predetermined set value, the control by the timing control means is prohibited by the prohibition means. As a result, when the voltage value supplied to the time measuring means is equal to or lower than the set value, the control processing is set to be prohibited by the time controlling means, so that erroneous control is executed based on inaccurate time information due to power shortage. There is an effect that defects can be suppressed.

<Feature H group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information necessary to execute a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can enter the game ball and the game ball entering the entrance; Dynamic display that dynamically displays identification information indicating the determination result of the success / failure by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit. Control means, storage means for storing the lottery information until at least the lottery condition is satisfied, and display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored in the storage means; When the first condition is satisfied and variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. And whether the variable means is in the second state. When the first release and the second condition that are variable to the first state are satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first release. Variable control means for changing at least to the second opening that is variable, and a game ball enters the entrance opening while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, and the identification information And a start information display control means for causing the display means to display a start display mode indicating the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the lottery information acquisition means obtains the lottery information necessary to execute the game lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display control unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The variable means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening that is variable by the variable means from the second state to the first state and when the second condition is satisfied, the player is more advantageous than the first opening. The variable control means changes the second opening from the second state to the first state. When the game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, the start display indicating the start of the dynamic display The mode is displayed on the display means by the start information display control means. Thereby, while changing to 2nd opening | release, it can alert | report to a player intelligibly that the identification information based on the game ball having entered into the entrance is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the player will enter the ball with the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine H1, a game ball is configured to be able to enter at all times, and based on the entrance of the game ball, the lottery information has a constant entrance to be acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and the storage means The lottery information acquired on the basis of having entered the entrance and the lottery information acquired on the basis of having always entered the entrance, respectively. Yes, the lottery information stored in the storage means is such that the lottery information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance is preferentially satisfied with the lottery condition, and the start information display control means includes: A game ball enters the entrance during the second opening, and the identification information indicating the determination result based on the lottery information entered in the regular entrance is dynamically displayed. The start display mode is displayed during the dynamic display. Gaming machine H2, and characterized in that Shimesuru.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means is configured so that the lottery information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance and the game ball can always enter, and the lottery information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball. The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball is always entered into the entrance slot acquired by the means is individually stored. In the lottery information stored in the storage means, the lottery conditions are established with priority on the lottery information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance. When the game ball enters the entrance during the second opening, and the identification information indicating the determination result based on the lottery information always entered the entrance is dynamically displayed, A start display mode is displayed by the start information display control means during the dynamic display. Therefore, since the start display mode is displayed before the identification symbol entered at the second opening is dynamically displayed, the identification symbol based on having entered at the second opening in advance is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can be notified.

<Feature I group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information necessary to execute a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can enter the game ball and the game ball entering the entrance; On the basis of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, a determination unit for determining whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied, and a storage unit for storing the lottery information until at least the lottery condition is satisfied. A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored in the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance, and a game ball than the first state. Variable means that can be changed to a second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a first opening that can change the variable means from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied, rather than the first opening Based on establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, variable control means for changing the variable means at least to a second opening that is variable from the second state to the first state so as to be advantageous to a technician, A determination unit that determines whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied; a determination information display unit that dynamically displays determination information indicating a determination result by the determination unit; and a display time for dynamically displaying the determination information. Display time determining means for determining, wherein the display time determining means establishes the lottery opportunity a predetermined number of times based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means. The game machine I1 is characterized in that a display time longer than that in the normal state is determined until the time.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the lottery information acquisition means acquires lottery information necessary for executing the game lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The variable means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, the player is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The variable means is changed at least by the variable control means to the second opening that is changed from the second state to the first state. Based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, the determination means determines whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Determination information indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed by the determination information display unit. The display time for dynamically displaying the determination information is determined by the display time determining means. Based on the display of the determination information indicating the second condition on the determination information display means, the display time determination means determines a display time longer than the normal time until a lottery trigger is established a predetermined number of times. Thereby, even when the second condition is continuously established, the display time longer than the normal time is determined after the second release, so that the identification symbol based on the lottery information stored in the storage means during that time is determined. Is dynamically displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of lottery information stored in the storage means becomes excessive.

<Feature J group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information used for a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can be entered, a game ball entering the entrance, and the lottery information acquisition Storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the means until at least a start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means for individually displaying discrimination symbols corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means; Based on the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to execute determination, a symbol display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification symbol When the lottery information is stored in the storage means and the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the display mode, whether the determination is successful or not based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the determination result is a hit, the determination symbol variable display means for changing the display mode of the determination symbol in a display mode capable of identifying the determination result by the prior determination unit, and the determination result A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a timing means capable of timing, and a timing data discriminating means for discriminating timing data by the timing means. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means when the dynamic display mode is determined to be a predetermined set value by the time data determination is different from other periods. Effect period setting means for setting at least a specific period to be determined and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period, and the discrimination symbol variable means Setting of the preparation period is prohibited when it is determined that the determination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a more specific determination of success / failure and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the determination symbol ends within the preparation period. A gaming machine J1 having a prohibiting means.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discrimination symbols are individually displayed by the discrimination symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, whether or not the hit is determined is determined by the hit / no-go determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the symbol display unit. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the lottery information is stored in the storage unit, whether or not the winning / no-go determination is made is determined based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminating symbol is varied by the discriminating symbol variable display unit in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail judgment unit can be identified. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discriminating means. A specification in which a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined to be different from other periods when it is determined that the preset value is determined by the timing data determination. The period and the preparation period for starting the specific period are set at least by the production period setting means before the specific period. Setting of the preparation period is prohibited when it is determined that the determination symbol is displayed in the display mode indicating the specific success / failure display by the determination symbol variable means and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the determination symbol ends within the preparation period. Prohibited by means. As a result, it is possible to set a period in which the preparation period is not set, and it is possible to predict the success / failure determination result depending on whether or not the player sets the preparation period. Therefore, there is an effect that the gameability can be further improved and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Feature K group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information used for a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can be entered, a game ball entering the entrance, and the lottery information acquisition Storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the means until at least a start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means for individually displaying discrimination symbols corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means; Based on the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to execute determination, a symbol display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification symbol A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a display mode, and a suggestion that suggests a result of the determination by the determination unit while the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is displayed. Suggestion display control means for displaying the display mode on the display means, suggestion display mode determination means for determining the suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control means based on the result of the determination of correctness / inappropriateness, and the storage In the case where the lottery information is stored in the means, prior determination means for executing the determination on the basis of the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied, and determination by the prior determination means A privileged game that executes a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination symbol variable display means for changing the display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode in which the result can be identified, and that the determination result is correct. In a gaming machine having an execution means, a clock means capable of timing, a clock data discriminating means for discriminating clock data by the clock means, When it is determined that the set value is predetermined by data determination, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is determined to be different from the other period. An effect period setting means for setting at least a specific period and a preparation period for prohibiting display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period, and the suggestion display control means are determined by the determination symbol variable means as a specific success / failure determination. It is determined that the discriminating symbol is displayed in the display mode, and that the dynamic display of the discriminating symbol corresponding to the discriminating symbol is started within the preparation period and the dynamic display is ended within the specific period. In this case, the suggestion display mode is displayed after the transition to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discrimination symbols are individually displayed by the discrimination symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, whether or not the hit is determined is determined by the hit / no-go determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the symbol display unit. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. While the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is displayed, the suggestion display mode that suggests the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit by the suggestion display control unit. The suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control unit is determined by the suggestion display mode determination unit based on the determination result of the determination by the determination unit. When the lottery information is stored in the storage unit, whether or not to win is determined by the prior hit determination unit based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminating symbol is varied by the discriminating symbol variable display unit in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail judgment unit can be identified. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discrimination means. A specification in which a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined to be different from other periods when it is determined that the preset value is determined by the timing data determination. The period and the preparation period for prohibiting the display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period are each set by at least the production period setting means. The suggestion display control means displays the discrimination symbol in a display mode indicating a specific success / failure determination by the discrimination symbol variable means, and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol starts dynamic display within the preparation period, When it is determined that the dynamic display is finished within the specific period, the suggestion display mode is displayed by the suggestion display control unit after the transition to the specific period. Thereby, since the suggestion display mode is displayed in the specific period, the player can be expected to enter the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
In the gaming machine K1, the suggestion display control means displays the suggestion display mode on the display means in response to the transition to the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. In other words, the suggestion display mode is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means triggered by the transition to the specific period. Therefore, since the suggestion display mode is displayed at the timing of shifting to the specific period, there is an effect that the suggestion display mode can be displayed at the timing synchronized with other same gaming machines.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the determination symbol of the display mode indicating the specific determination of success / failure is a display mode indicating that the determination result of success / failure is a win.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the determination pattern of the display mode indicating the specific determination of success / failure is the result of the determination of success / failure, so that the player wins when the specific period comes There is an effect that it can be recognized and can be recognized easily in a specific period.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the suggestion display mode determination unit is configured to display the suggestion display mode indicating that the determination result by the determination unit is correct when the specific period is set. A gaming machine K4 that determines a specific suggestion display mode.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the specific period is set, the suggestion display mode determination unit determines that the specific suggestion display mode is the suggestion display mode determination unit as the suggestion display mode indicating that the determination result by the determination unit is correct. It is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the specific period can be increased, and the player can expect the specific period.

  In any one of the gaming machine K1 to the gaming machine K4, it has a sound output means capable of outputting sound, and a sound control means for executing control of sound output from the sound output means, the sound control means being When the special game is executed by the special game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, at least the special period is set until the specific period is set. A gaming machine K5 that controls to output a sound volume related to a game at a volume lower than normal.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are produced. That is, the sound control means executes control of sound output from the sound output means capable of outputting sound. When a special game is executed by the special game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, at least the audio related to the special game is recorded until the specific period is set. Control is performed by the sound control means so that the sound volume is output at a sound volume smaller than normal. Therefore, even if it is a big hit before the specified period, it makes it difficult for surrounding players to notice that it is a big hit, and it makes it easier to think as if it was a big hit when the specified period comes be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that it is likely to be a big hit in a specific period.

<Feature L group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, and can measure time even when power is not supplied, and time data acquisition means for acquiring time data from the time measurement means , Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a time control means for executing control processing relating to a predetermined game, and control by the time control means A switching means that can be switched at least to one setting and a second setting that prohibits the control by the timing control means, a switching setting means for switching setting by operating the switching means, and the operation of the switching operation means are controlled. And a game machine L1 having an operation control means.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period of time, and time is measured by the time measuring means even when power is not supplied. Timing data is acquired from the timing means by the timing data acquisition means. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. The switching means switches between a first setting for executing control by the timekeeping control means and a second setting for prohibiting control by the timekeeping control means. Switching is set by the switching setting means by operating the switching means. The operation of the switching operation means is controlled by the operation control means. Thereby, since the switching means is operated and switched by the switching setting means, there is an effect that the setting can be automatically switched without manually setting.

<Feature M group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has power supply means that can supply power for a predetermined period, and can operate even when power is not supplied, time data acquisition means for obtaining time data from the time measurement means, and time measurement Timing control means for executing a control process related to a predetermined game based on the timing data acquired by the data acquisition means, and the timing means is supplied with power to the gaming machine. If not, switching means for switching between a first state in which power is supplied from the power supply means and a second state in which power is supplied from the gaming machine based on the supply of power to the gaming machine. A gaming machine M1 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even if no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the power supply means can supply power for a predetermined period of time, and the time measurement data is obtained by the time data acquisition means from the time measurement means operable even when the power is not supplied. To be acquired. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. In the timing means, when the gaming machine is not supplied with power, the gaming machine is supplied with power based on the first state in which power is supplied from the power supply means and the gaming machine is supplied with power. The second state is switched by the switching means. As a result, the period during which power can be supplied during a period when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing means can be used for a longer time.

<Feature N group>
Main control means for executing control of the game, slave control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and display means, wherein the main control means has a predetermined condition. Based on the establishment, the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information, the storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means at least until the start condition is satisfied, and the establishment of the start condition Based on this, the dynamic determination time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying on the display means the correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination and the identification symbol indicating the correct / incorrect determination result by the correct / incorrect determination means. Dynamic display time determining means, dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and This A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determining means is stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that it is a win, and the slave control means Is a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and a display for displaying the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In the gaming machine having the control means, the slave control means includes an operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means for determining whether the operation means has been operated, and the identification symbol by the operation determination means. Switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on determining that the operating unit has been operated when Secondary control The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit is prohibited from switching to another dynamic display mode and the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit. A switching prohibition period to be set, and the dynamic display information signal includes a first time that is a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and a dynamic display time And a second time that is the remaining time after a predetermined time elapses, and the dynamic display mode determining means stores the dynamic display mode up to the second time in the storage means. The first dynamic display mode determined based on the number of lottery information and the first dynamic display mode are dynamically displayed and determined based on the second time after the second time. To determine the second dynamic display mode to be A gaming machine N1 characterized in that the gaming machine is N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the game control is executed by the main control means. Based on the control signal from the main control means, control of the game is executed by the sub control means. In the main control means, lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit at least until the start condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, whether or not the hit is determined is determined by the hit / no-go determining means. The dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display time determination unit. A dynamic display information generating unit generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control unit of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining unit. On the basis of the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that it is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. In the sub control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is display-controlled by the display control unit. It is determined by the operation determining means whether the operating means operable by the player has been operated. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination unit, the switching unit switches the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on determining that the operation unit is operated. . In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit of the sub control unit, the switching unit switches to another dynamic display mode and the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode. A switching prohibition period during which prohibition is prohibited is set. In the dynamic display information signal, a first time that is the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and a second time that is the remaining time after a predetermined time of the dynamic display time, It is comprised with the signal which shows. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode up to the second time based on the number of lottery information stored in the storage means. The first dynamic display mode and the first dynamic display mode are dynamic. Since the second dynamic display mode to be determined based on the second time is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means between the display and the second time, the dynamic display mode is determined when the dynamic display starts. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine D3 that is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a, 64b Second start opening (entrance entrance)
64c Electric character (variable means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display control means)
203a, 203b Special symbol 1, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
S305 Winning determination means S406, S413 Lottery information acquisition means S1005 Variable control means S1488 Part of start information display control means S1703 Display control means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Then, in order to increase the winning of the game ball to the start opening, an ordinary electric accessory is provided at the start opening. When a lottery that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the ordinary electric accessory is provided, and a lottery is performed as a game ball passes through the throughgate. There is known a pachinko machine that operates an electric accessory for a certain period of time to make it easy to enter a game ball into a starting port.

  In such a pachinko machine, there are a plurality of opening patterns of ordinary electric accessories, and there are two opening patterns: a long opening in which the opening time is longer than normal and a normal opening in which the opening time is set shorter than that. Some are set. In addition, there is a type of notifying the player in advance of the long release by discriminating in a state in which the fluctuation before the start of the normal symbol lottery is held.

JP2013-13528A

In this type of pachinko machine, a player, it is difficult to perform the game with confidence.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine in which a player can play a game with peace of mind.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a game ball ball entrance capable ball entrance means, based on the game ball has ball entrance to the ball entrance means, executes a lottery game and information acquisition means for acquiring information required, the gaming ball is ball entrance configured to be capable at all times, based on the input ball game ball, always ball entrance means the information is acquired by the information acquisition means If, based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and determine a constant means for performing determination, dynamic display causes dynamic display unit to display identification information for indicating determine constant results by that determine the constant means A control means, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; a storage means for storing the information, Yu before entry ball means A variable, variable means and a second state sphere to difficult ball entrance of game ball than the first state and the first state easily ball entrance, when the first condition is satisfied, the variable means When the first release and the second condition that are variable from the second state to the first state are satisfied, the variable means is moved from the second state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first release. A variable control means that changes at least the variable means to the second opening that is changed to the first state, and a game ball is placed on the ball entry means while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means. Specific mode display means for displaying on the display means a specific mode for notifying that the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the pitch is started when entering the ball, The specific mode display means is variable to the second opening. For indicating that the determination result of the information acquired when the game ball has entered the ball entry means is other than the specific determination result. If the identification information is dynamically displayed, the specific mode is displayed during the dynamic display, and when the game ball enters the ball entry means while being changed to the second opening, If the identification information for indicating that the determination result of the information acquired by entering the constantly entering means is the specific determination result is displayed dynamically, during the dynamic display In a case where the specific mode is not displayed , and the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the incoming ball on which the specific mode is displayed is started, a special effect is executed during the dynamic display. Is .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, information necessary to execute a lottery of a game based on a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball entering the ball entry means. The information acquisition means for acquiring the game ball, the game ball can be entered at any time, and the information acquisition means for obtaining the information based on the entry of the game ball, and the information acquisition means. Based on the acquired information, determination means for executing determination, dynamic display control means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the determination result is a specific determination When the identification information for indicating the result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, a storage means for storing the information, The game ball is easy to enter the entry ball means. Variable means that can be changed between a state and a second state that makes it difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and when the first condition is satisfied, the variable means changes from the second state to the first state. When the first release and the second condition that are changed to the state are satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first release. Variable control means for changing at least the variable means to the second opening, and when a game ball enters the ball entering means while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, Specific aspect display means for causing the display means to display a specific aspect for informing that the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to a sphere is started, and the specific aspect display means, While entering the second opening, the pitcher When the game ball enters, the identification information for dynamically indicating that the determination result of the information acquired by entering the constantly entering means is other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. If it is, the specific mode is displayed during the dynamic display, and when the game ball enters the ball entry means while being changed to the second opening, the ball enters the regular ball entry means. If the identification information for indicating that the determination result of the information acquired by the ball is the specific determination result is dynamically displayed, the specific mode is not displayed during the dynamic display. When the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the incoming ball on which the specific mode is displayed is started, a special effect is executed during the dynamic display.

Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the notice display mode per long time. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the notice display per long time, (b) is a typical example of the notice display of the change with respect to the holding ball which won the 2nd starting opening during the long time. FIG. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the notice display of the change with respect to the holding ball which won the 2nd starting opening during a long time. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the notice display of the change with respect to the reservation ball which won a 2nd starting opening during a long time. (A) is the upper perspective view which showed the positional relationship of the frame button of a pachinko machine, and a touch switch, (b) showed the display mode in case the total frequency | count of a day fluctuation of a pachinko machine was displayed. It is the figure which showed an example, (c) is the enlarged view which expanded and showed the changeover switch of the pachinko machine. (A) is a timing chart showing the period setting from power-on of the pachinko machine, (b) is an example showing a background image displayed in the preparation period of the pachinko machine, (c), It is an example which showed the background image displayed in the time production period of a pachinko machine. (A)-(b) is the figure shown about the example of the notice effect display aspect of the touch sensor displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus of a pachinko machine, (c) is the 3rd symbol display apparatus of a pachinko machine. It is the figure shown about an example of the notice effect display mode displayed by. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode A selection, (b) is a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode B selection. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode A selection, (b) is a 3rd symbol display apparatus at the time of background mode B selection. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed. It is the figure which showed the timing chart about each background mode when the fluctuation pattern in which addition time was set was selected. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM in the main controller, and (c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a RAM in the main control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the figure which showed the list of the change pattern command and addition command which are output from the main control apparatus of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table B which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the special figure which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table. 1 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table B. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern selection table B which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table, and (b) is a special figure which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table C. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM content of a voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the model which showed typically a part of RAM content of a voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the pending | holding effect selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the prefetch effect lottery table, (c)-(d ) Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a prefetch effect selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the notice selection table A, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the notice selection table C typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the touch notice selection table, (b) is the figure which made a list about the setting of a changeover switch. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table for a notice. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory release process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding effect selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number transfer process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch effect selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation change process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the notice effect display process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the mode switching process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the addition command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the opening display mode of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the case where the pachinko machine in the second embodiment is won per normal symbol for a long time, the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 0, and the game ball wins the second starting port. It is the timing chart which showed an example until special symbol 2 starts change when special symbol 1 is fluctuating (remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more), and (b) is a pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 6 is a timing chart of a display mode showing an example of a state in which the special symbol 1 does not change when a normal ball is won for a long time and a game ball is won at the second start opening. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display data table of the usual figure opening effect of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the common figure opening process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM in FIG. 6C, and FIG. 10C is a normal variation pattern selection table A (mode 1) which is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. FIG. 6D is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the normal variation pattern selection table B (mode 2) that is a part of the variation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a timing timing chart showing an example when the change stop timing of the special symbol notified by the rainbow-colored reserved symbol of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is the preparation period, (b) It is the timing chart which showed an example in case the fluctuation period of the special symbol alert | reported by the rainbow-colored holding | maintenance symbol of the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment straddles the preparation period from the time production period. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation change process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the list of the change pattern command and addition command which are output from the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment as an example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the addition command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RTC connected to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (B) is a conceptual diagram of the structure where the setting switch of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment is operated by a switching motor. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the notice of the fish charge which uses the touch sensor and board | substrate side touch sensor of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the card notice which is a notice effect which uses the touch sensor 290 and the board | substrate side touch sensor of the frame side of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 15) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 and a touch sensor 290 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

  The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later is changed or the content of the notice effect is changed. The In addition, the touch sensor 290 is, for example, based on the operation of the player's touch sensor 290 based on the display content of a dedicated effect using the touch sensor 290 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. Be changed. Further, the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving a driving tool or the like provided in the gaming machine, for example. The details of the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. However, the touch switch 290 is disposed closer to the front side of the gaming machine than the frame button 22, Normally, when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the touch switches are respectively arranged at positions where the player's hand can react.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The start opening 64 a, the second start opening 64 b, the electric accessory 64 c, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 15) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the special symbol 2 ( The first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. In the lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 (hereinafter, special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be referred to as a special symbol) performed for the entry to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, Whether the symbol is a big hit or not is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the type of jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). After 30 seconds), a special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first start port 64a while the special symbol variation display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of the ball is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, even when a ball enters the second starting port 64b while the special symbol is changing, the number of balls entered is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated on the first symbol display device 37. Both are also shown for the third symbol display device 81. Note that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode. As will be described in detail later, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of reserved balls, the variation display mode of special symbols, the determination result, etc. than the 1st symbol display device 37. The normal player is configured to play a game by looking at the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and the lottery The variable display according to is started. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 64b has priority over the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 64a, and the special symbol 2 is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery with respect to the holding ball of the first starting port 64a is configured to be executed when there is no holding ball at the second starting port 64b. While the change of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the change of the special symbol 1 is not executed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured such that there is no period that varies at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured not to vary at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary simultaneously. By configuring in this way, more games can be drawn in a short time and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be played more time-efficiently.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 64 b has an open state in which the game ball can be guided to the entrance port on both sides of the entrance port where the game ball enters, and the entrance to the entrance port. It has the electric accessory 64c provided with the blade | wing member which can be rotated to the closed state which regulates. The electric accessory 64c is operated for a predetermined time from the closed state to the open state based on a winning (winning) of a normal symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, normally, it is held in an upright state so as to prevent the entry of game balls from both sides of the entrance, so that the game balls are prevented from entering between the blade members. The first start port 64a is disposed. Therefore, the second starting port 64b is normally configured to be able to enter the ball only when the electric accessory 64c is activated. Therefore, normally, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first start port 64a, and the player plays the game ball by launching the game ball to enter the first start port 64a. It will be a thing.

  Note that the special prize opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 enters the special gaming state is provided immediately below the second start opening 64b. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first start opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first start port 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. There are two types of normal symbol hits: a normal hit and a normal hit, and a long time in which the opening time and the number of releases increase. When the normal symbol is hit normally or for a long time, the electric accessory associated with the second start port 64b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second start port 64b is opened. The ball is easy to enter. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable symbol display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is retained up to four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also shown. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, a special gaming state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds is set. Thereafter, when the jackpot is A, as a value added after the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot until the start of the jackpot game of the next special symbol ( Move on to the special symbol). On the other hand, “hit B” has a higher probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Even in the high probability state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is similarly set up.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the normal symbol has a big hit probability (Special symbol normal state or low probability gaming state). In addition, the “ordinary symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short or short-time game state) means a game state in which the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second starting port 64b. Say. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (normal game state). It shows that. Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends is referred to as a special symbol probability change period.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “big jackpot A”, the period from the end of the “big jackpot A” to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probability variation period. The period during which the special symbol lottery (such as 100 times or 100 times) is executed may be set as the probability variation period. Further, both “big hit A” and “big hit B” may be set to have a predetermined number of periods and a probability variation period. The probability variation period may naturally be a certain variation period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”.

  In addition, while the “high probability state of the special symbol” continues, if the jackpot of the special symbol becomes a new and the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the “high probability state of the special symbol” It continues from the end of the jackpot of the new special symbol until the start of the next jackpot game.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 that is performed in accordance with the ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning prize) is being executed. By displaying the variation, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after the variation is ended, The number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, is indicated by the lighting state.

  The ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b while the variable display of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37. In the case of a ball, the number of entered balls is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of times of suspension is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

  Note that, for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are respectively assigned for displaying the symbol and displaying the number of reserved balls. By comprising in this way, it can comprise so that a player can distinguish the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 more easily.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning prize), it is used as a trigger for a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the starting port entered in the first symbol display device 37. Variation display of symbols is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 15) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of “1, 3, 4, 7, 9”, which are odd numbers, are all stopped and displayed. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” which are even numbers are aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm for displaying the third symbol in a variably manner, and the others. The lower third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first start port 64a, and the small area Ds2 is , A region for displaying the notice effect image, and the small region Ds3 is a region for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the second start port 64b. It is.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed at the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbol are displayed so as to be visible, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, doors, characters, characters, and the like are displayed in the small area Ds2 in the center, and it is suggested that the player is likely to make a transition to a big hit than usual, or that a normal symbol is hit. . In addition, by lowering the transparency of the main symbol displayed on the active line L1 and displaying it by increasing the transparency of the main symbol displayed other than that, the player can recognize the effective line more easily. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, in the sub display area Ds, the display mode of the reserved ball based on entering the first start port 64a displayed in the left small area Ds1, and the right small area Ds3 Is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the reserved ball of the second start port 64b displayed on the screen. Specifically, one “◯” is displayed for one holding ball of the first starting port 64a, and when there are two holding balls, two “○” are displayed side by side. The Similarly, “◯” is displayed side by side corresponding to the number of reserved balls. On the other hand, with respect to the holding ball of the second starting port 64b, “Δ” is displayed for one holding ball except for the holding ball that has entered the ball for a long time of the normal symbol. If the ball enters the second start port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), one “★” is displayed for one holding ball.

  Thereby, the holding balls of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, that is, the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball that has entered the second start port 64b is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the holding ball has been generated for a long time. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 include not only the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., but also a notice display such as a character display or a character, A display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is configured to be held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the reserved ball number is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the reserved ball number. You may make it display in the aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) which changes only by the part. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the normal display per unit for a long time of the normal symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81 and the long start of the normal symbol enter the second start port 64 b. A notice display mode that is executed for a ball that has been balled will be described. First, FIG. 5 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the opening of the electric utility item 64c due to a long time of a normal symbol is executed. Here, the lottery result of the changing normal symbol is determined, and when the lottery result is per long time, it is displayed in the small display area Ds2 in FIG. 5B three seconds before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. The door symbol door is slid in the opening direction (the left-right direction of the display area), and as shown in FIG. 5A, the symbol of the winning opening simulating the shape of the second starting port 64b is displayed.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the timing at which the normal symbol is stopped and the electric accessory 64c is released, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the electric accessory at the winning opening displayed in the small area Ds2 is activated. The symbol in the open state is displayed, and the player is informed that the electric accessory 64c is in the open state. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, when the display for opening the door symbol of the small region Ds2 is displayed, a dolphin symbol is displayed at the upper left of the small region Ds3.

The symbol of this dolphin displays a character “opening” in a balloon in accordance with the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (ordinary symbol stop display timing) to notify that the electric accessory 64c is in an open state. Is done. As described above, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time different from the normal hit, the third symbol display device 81 is notified in advance before the stop display is performed. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opportunity to open the electric accessory 64c.
Here, if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is the maximum number of four, and the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a long variation time such as reach, the player Even if a game ball is fired and a ball enters the first start port 64a, it becomes an invalid ball that does not become a reserved ball, so the game ball is stopped and the reserved ball is digested. There are many cases where a game is played after waiting. In such a case, even if the ball is started to fire on the basis of the fact that the normal symbol is won for a long time and the electric accessory 64c is opened for a long time, It is difficult to enter the ball, and the ball cannot enter the second start port 64b by effectively using the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

  However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is informed in advance that the electric accessory 64c will be in an open state before a predetermined time (three seconds before in this embodiment) before it is released for a long time. The player can play the game while preventing the opportunity to enter the ball into the second starting port 64b.

  Next, FIG. 6 (a) shows that a special ball is inserted into the second starting port 64b when the electric accessory 64c is operated in an open state on the basis of a long time of normal symbols. It is the display mode which showed the state by which the four hold balls are set to the pattern 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, the holding symbol of the holding ball formed by entering the second starting port 64b in the open state of the electric accessory 64c per long time is “ One “★” is displayed. When there are four reserved balls, four “★” are displayed side by side as shown in FIG.

  Next, FIG. 6 (b) shows that the electric accessory 64c shifts from the open state to the closed state, and a lottery is executed for one reserved ball for the special symbol 2 to start the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. It is the figure which showed the state made. For a holding ball that is formed by entering the electric accessory 64c by hitting an ordinary symbol for a long time, a dolphin displayed in the small area Ds3 performs a notice display by a balloon at the start of the change every time. In FIG. 6A, when one of the four reserved balls starts to change, “?” Is displayed by a balloon. This “?” Is not included in the lottery that starts to fluctuate, or the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is included (all are out of place) than when the winning determination result is included. It is set so that it can be easily selected (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24A), and it is informed that the probability of being hit by the player is low.

  Next, FIG. 7 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when one of the reserved balls is further digested from the state of FIG. 6 (b) and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is started. In FIG. 7A, at the start of the variation of the special symbol 2, a character “chance?” Is displayed to notify the player of a notice display related to the result of the determination of success / failure. The notice display of “chance?” Is set to be easier to select than the winning case when the determination result (including the start of variation, including the determination result of the holding ball of the special symbol 2) is off. Thereby, the player can predict the success / failure determination result in advance.

  Next, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state in which one reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is further digested from the reserved number of FIG. 7A and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is started. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a case where a dolphin displays a notice “chance !!” with a balloon at the start of the variable display of the special symbol 2. The notice display of “Chance !!” is set to be easier to select than when it is missed when the result of the success / failure judgment (including the start of fluctuation, the result of the judgment of the holding ball of the special symbol 2) is win. (See FIG. 24A). Thereby, the player can predict the success / failure determination result in advance.

  Next, FIG. 8 shows a case where one special symbol 2 reserved ball is further digested from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 7B, and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is started. It is the figure which showed the display mode. In FIG. 8, at the start of the change of the special symbol 2, the characters “Large chance !!” are displayed to notify the player of a notice display related to the determination result of the special symbol 2 being changed. The notice display of “Large chance !!” is set so that it is easier to select when the determination result of the special symbol 2 that is fluctuating is winning than when it is out of place (see FIG. 24A). . Thereby, the player can play a game in expectation that the winning / failing determination result of the changing special symbol 2 is a big hit.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern selected in the variation display of the special symbol 2 is always reachable when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is zero. The variation pattern to be selected is selected regardless of the determination result. That is, based on the fact that the normal symbol is per unit for a long time, the electric accessory 64c is in an open state, a plurality of balls enter the second start port 64b, and then start to change in order. Even if the result of lottery of the selected ball is out of the range, the variation pattern that will be reached is always selected in the variation display of the last reserved ball.

  In addition, in the case of a change in the holding ball caused by entering the second starting port 64b by operating the electric accessory 64c for a long time, a notice display relating to the determination result is continuously displayed every time when the change starts. Configured. Furthermore, as the number of consecutive times increases, it is configured so that a notice display that makes it possible to expect that the determination result is a big hit is easy to select, so that the player becomes the normal symbol for a long time, The lottery executed when the ball is entered into the second starting port 64b can be made to feel that it is easier to win a lottery than the lottery executed by winning the first starting port 64a at the normal time. Furthermore, in the case of the special symbol 2 held ball that has been generated for a long time, the last variation (the lottery executed when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is 0) will always select the variation pattern that will be reached. Since it was comprised, even if a lottery result is unsuccessful, the expectation degree to a player's jackpot can be raised. Therefore, the player can expect the variation display of the special symbol 2 triggered by a long time as a special variation display, and can play a game with a higher expectation that the normal symbol will be per unit for a long time. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5B, the dolphin notice display displayed in the small area Ds3 at the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with a stop symbol indicating per-hour, Although it is configured to display the characters “open”, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol stops as early as the time from when the player launches the game ball to the second start port 64b. You may comprise so that it may display before displaying. By comprising in this way, a game ball can be awarded to the 2nd starting port 64b, using longer time effectively.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that it may alert | report about 2 second earlier than the time which a game ball arrives. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that it becomes advantageous too much for a player. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is advantageous to the player while protecting the profit of the game store side.

  Next, the positional relationship between the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 22 will be described with reference to FIG. The touch sensor 290 is provided side by side in front of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. The touch sensor 290 incorporates a reflective photosensor inside, and an output portion from which the LED of the photosensor is output is attached with a cover member made of a transparent black resin member. It is arranged on the surface of the pachinko machine 10. In the touch sensor 290, when a player puts a hand or the like close to a predetermined interval to the photosensor output unit and blocks the light from the LED, the LED light is reflected and input to the input unit of the photosensor. Thus, it is a configuration for detecting. The photo sensor 290 is electrically connected to the input / output port of the sound lamp control device 113, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether the touch sensor 290 is on. Yes. The touch sensor 290 is an operation means that can be operated by the player in order to change the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the frame button 22.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A to 11B, an effect is produced in which the touch sensor 290 is continuously detected by the player and the indicator is changed (stored). As the indicator can be changed to a larger scale, the player is more likely to receive a jackpot on the player.

  Further, since the touch sensor 290 is provided on the player side with respect to the frame button 22, the touch sensor 290 is configured to be easily detected and turned on even when the player presses the frame button 22. . Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is pressed, the touch sensor 290 can be turned on.

  Next, FIG. 9 (b) shows the total number of fluctuations since the player turned on when the standby screen (demo screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 8 is a display example when displayed on 81. FIG. In this way, the player can check how much the game is being played.

  Next, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing the setting switch 291 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 3). As shown in FIG. 3, the setting switch 291 is provided below the RAM erase switch 122 so as to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, the setting switch 291 is constituted by a dip-type changeover switch. The input is switched by rotating, and the setting can be switched from “1” to “4”. A display window for setting confirmation is provided on the external cover so that the setting value can be confirmed, and the setting value can be visually recognized from the display window by rotating the setting switch 291. As shown in FIG. 15, the setting switch 291 is configured to be electrically connected so that a setting signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, each setting is arranged so as to be switched when it is rotated every 90 degrees, and a lock mechanism that is lightly locked so that it is difficult to rotate from other areas when it is rotated to each set value is provided. .

  FIG. 26B shows the control content set by each setting of the changeover switch 291. When the setting is 1, the display using the RTC 292 is set to be effective, and the display of the total number of changes shown in FIG. 9B is set to be effective. Similarly, setting 2 is set so that RTC 292 is invalid and the total variation count is displayed, setting 3 is set so that RTC 292 is valid and total variation count is not displayed, and setting 4 is invalid for RTC 292. The display of the total number of fluctuations is set to non-display.

  Next, the time effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a timing chart showing a period in which a time effect is executed from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the power is turned off in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, an RTC (real time clock) 292 for measuring time, which will be described later, is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to measure the time since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Has been.

  When 54 minutes (period A in FIG. 10 (a)) have elapsed since the power was turned on, a preparation period (period B in FIG. 10 (a)) for executing a time effect for 1 minute thereafter is set. Thereafter, a time effect period (period C in FIG. 10A) in which the time effect is executed is set. Here, when the preparation period is set, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), a background image on which characters “Soon, super fish time starts” is set, and a time effect is started for the player soon. Notification is performed to indicate that. Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 22, the variation time of the special symbol selected in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is 30 seconds at the longest, and the variation pattern executed before the preparation period ends. Is configured to do.

  As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 22 (a), “superreach” is not set for the change pattern that starts to change during the preparation period. The display mode is also not displayed. In the time production period, when the success / failure determination result is a jackpot, the special fish school that informs that the jackpot is confirmed is configured to be displayed more easily than usual, and super reach and notice display are displayed during the preparation period. By configuring so that it is not displayed, the freshness of the notice display in the time effect period can be enhanced.

  After the preparatory period of 1 minute has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the background image on which the characters “in super school time” indicating that the time production period is in progress is displayed in the third symbol display. It is displayed on the device 81. In the background image of this time effect period, an image in which a plurality of small fish swim is displayed, so that the player can have an impression different from the normal time. Then, when the time production period of 5 minutes elapses, the background image is changed to a normal background image (a background image corresponding to the mode selected before the preparation period), and a special symbol lottery is subsequently executed. Is done. After that, when 54 minutes have passed, the preparation period is set again, and then the time effect period is set. In this way, it is repeatedly executed at the same time interval.

  If the jackpot game is started before the preparation period or if the jackpot game is started during the preparation period, the period corresponding to the time at that time after the jackpot game ends (periods A to C) Is set. In this period, for example, if the jackpot game is started in the preparation period and the end of the jackpot game is the remaining one minute of the time effect period, a time effect of 1 minute is executed.

  With this configuration, the power cable is connected to the power supply outlet in the hall while the power switch (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Similarly, the other similar pachinko machines 10 are also connected to the power supply outlets. A plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be simultaneously powered on by providing a switch such as a breaker that can switch whether or not to supply electricity to the power supply outlet.

  Therefore, by simultaneously turning on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the present embodiment, the timing at which the time effect is executed can be adjusted by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In addition, in the present embodiment, before the time effect period is set, since the preparation period constituted by a time longer than the longest variation time of the special symbol is set, the start of the time effect period is further started. Can be matched.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the preparation period and the time effect period are executed is set as described above. In addition, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a time effect on each pachinko machine 10 when a predetermined time elapses is executed, and only the pachinko machine 10 that wins the lottery executes the time effect. May be. Further, it may be configured such that the player can select whether or not to execute the time effect by operating the frame button 22 or the like at the time when the time effect is executed or at the time of standby.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 will be described. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which a notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the change of the special symbol. When the notice effect display is determined and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reduced to the upper right side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 displays an indicator as shown in FIG. Before the touch sensor 290 reacts (detects), the indicator is displayed with a scale of “0” and indicates to the player that the touch sensor 290 reacts to increase (charge) the indicator scale. "!" Is displayed. Then, when the player puts his hand over the touch sensor 290 (touches the touch sensor 290) to turn the touch sensor 290 on (reacted state), the scale of the indicator is increased. Yes. FIG. 11A shows a state where the indicator is raised to the scale “1”. FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state where the indicator is raised to the scale “2”.

  In this embodiment, although details will be described later, the change of the indicator that operates based on the touch sensor 290 being turned on is determined in advance by lottery. The indicator lottery is executed based on the determination result of the special symbol starting to fluctuate, the fluctuating pattern, and the value 223k of the production count t. A larger scale is more easily set when the determination result is a win than when it is out of place. Further, when the selected variation pattern is a “super reach” variation pattern, a larger scale is more easily selected than when “normal reach” is selected. Note that the present embodiment is configured such that the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is not selected when the fluctuation pattern is “reaching for a short time” or “out of a long time” when reach is not reached.

  By configuring in this way, when the notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is displayed at the start of the change of the special symbol, the player identifies that the change that has started the change display is a reach display mode, Next, the photo sensor 290 can be operated to enjoy the game so that the scale of the indicator can be raised. When the scale of the indicator is increased to a large scale, the player can increase the expectation for the jackpot and can enjoy the game more.

  FIG. 11C shows the lower right (small area Ds3) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, ten times) during the special symbol variation display. A notice effect display (special notice display) simulating a placard is displayed. Thus, by displaying the notice effect based on the player's specific operation, the player can be prevented from being bored during the game. This notice display is a notice display set in the process of S1913 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  With reference to FIGS. 12-13, an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of the background mode A and the background mode B displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the reach display mode is achieved when the super reach variation pattern is selected and the background mode A is selected. FIG. 12B shows a display mode on the third symbol display device 81 when the same variation pattern as that in FIG. 12A is selected and the background mode B is selected at the same timing. FIG. As described above, even when the same variation pattern is selected, the displayed background contents are different due to the selected background mode being different, and furthermore, the timing of the display in the reach display mode is also different. . In the background mode B shown in FIG. 12 (b), a pseudo symbol having the same configuration as the main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the actual main symbol is reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. Fluctuation is displayed. By configuring in this way, in the background mode B, it can be recognized as if it was stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the detachment. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the background mode A, an effect display indicating whether or not to develop into a special reach is executed. On the other hand, in the background mode B, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the pseudo symbol imitating the main symbol starts to fluctuate again and is displayed variably, and the actual main symbol is displayed on the right as shown in FIG. 13 (b). Reduced down and displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the variation display mode in each background mode shown in FIGS. 12 to 13 described above. According to the background mode selected by the player with the frame button 22, the special symbol variation display is started based on the variation start timing. Whether the background mode A is selected or the background mode B is selected, the start timing of the change is the same.

  In the present embodiment, although details will be described later, when the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines a variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection table is displayed. In addition to the type, a variation pattern command indicating a fixed time and an addition command indicating an addition time for adding a time determined in the variation pattern are output to the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, the command output from the main controller 110 for determining the variation pattern is composed of two commands, that is, the addition command indicating the addition time in addition to the variation pattern command. In addition, it is comprised so that it may become the variation time determined by lottery when the fixed time and addition time which a variation pattern shows are totaled. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can select an effect with a high degree of freedom by this addition command.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after the start of the change, the change display set in a fixed time is executed. In the case of this example, the fixed time is set to 8000 ms, and is configured with the same time as the fluctuation time of short-time deviation. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 makes the same change as the short-time deviation with respect to the display control device 114 in the background mode A based on this fixed time, and then the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed in a reach display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 12A). On the other hand, in the case of the background mode B, after the same fluctuation display as that of a short-time deviation is displayed, a pseudo symbol similar to the main symbol is displayed, and a stop symbol indicating a deviation in the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. The symbol is reduced and displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 12B). The SW effective period, which is the period during which the background mode can be changed, is also set to 4000 ms as in the case of a short time deviation.

  The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 indicates that the addition command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the SW valid period has elapsed and the background mode cannot be changed by the player. Based on the addition time, an effect after a fixed time has elapsed is determined based on the selected background mode, and a display command is output to the display control device 114. In the example shown in FIG. 79, in the background mode A, an effect for notifying the player whether or not the super reach shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the background mode B is selected, after the fixed time has elapsed, the pseudo symbol starts to fluctuate, and a fluctuating display similar to that for a short time deviation is executed. Note that the actual main symbol continues to be variably displayed at high speed while being reduced to the small region Ds3. After that, while the variable display is displayed again with the same fluctuation display (fluctuation time) as that of the short time deviation, specifically, while the high-speed fluctuation is occurring, the pseudo symbol is replaced with the actual main symbol. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating reach display. Thereafter, the background mode A and the background mode B execute the same super reach display mode at the same timing.

  In this way, in a configuration in which a player can select a plurality of background modes in one variation display of a special symbol so that different variation displays can be enjoyed, a plurality of effects are each reproduced and processed. In the configuration in which the reproduction process is executed at the timing based on the change of the mode or the switching of the background mode, there is a problem that the control load of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 increases. . However, as in this embodiment, as a command for selecting a variation pattern, a command that indicates a fixed time and a command that indicates an addition time are used as commands to select a variation pattern. By controlling to execute the fluctuation display of (changes the fluctuation display at the time of passage and the background only), and when the period in which the background mode can be changed has passed, by determining the effect based on the command indicating the addition time, A control process for determining only one effect is sufficient, and the control load can be reduced. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 does not need to calculate the remaining fluctuation time and determine an effect or the like, and the load necessary for the control can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed, and stops after the variation ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol is displayed. Done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b operates for a predetermined time. As a result, the second start port 64b is easily put in a ball. The number of passes through which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is not limited to four times as in the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, but is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first start port 64a and a second start port 64b through which balls can enter are disposed. When a ball enters the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, a first entrance switch and a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. When the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch are turned on, the main controller 110 draws the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and displays the first symbol display device 37 according to the lottery result. LED 37a. The first start port 64a and the second start port 64b are also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter.

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same. However, the number of winning balls is not limited to this, and may be different. For example, when entering the first starting port 64a, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 64b is set as three prize balls, and when entering the second starting port 64b, the number of prize balls for the second starting port 64b is set to the first number. The number may be set larger than the number of prize balls for one start port 64a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give more prize balls to the player when the normal symbol per unit for a long time, and it is possible to further increase the value per unit time of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game in anticipation of a bonus other than the special symbol, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. In addition, the player can obtain more prize balls during the short time and the probability change period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player's possession ball is extremely reduced during the short time and the probability change period.

  On the other hand, when the number of winning balls in the second starting port 64b is set to be smaller than that in the first starting port 64a, it is possible to design so that more game balls are awarded to the second starting port 64b in the probability change period or in a shorter time. Thus, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a higher number, and an efficient game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the game time of the probability variation period during the time saving, and to increase the sales at the game store side.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 15). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type in the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 A special hit type counter C2 to be used, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. Further, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing a special symbol 1 reserved ball and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b composed of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided. Is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the same value is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). The configuration is back. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 has a timing at which the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is set as the special symbol. When the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the big hit random number table matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 is reached at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The aspect is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot types, “big hit A” and “big hit B” are set, and either of “big hit A” or “big hit B” is set by the special hit type counter C2. It is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-299. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability. Stored in the random number table. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Stored in Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, in the special hit type counter C2 set in the big hit type selection table (not shown), the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the special hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the special bonus type counter C2 (random value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation display counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 17B) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 is set for each gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state, probability variation gaming state). In addition, although it demonstrates in detail by description about the selection of the fluctuation | variation pattern in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 mentioned later, in the main control apparatus 110, it is based on the determination result, the number of reservation balls, and the value of the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1. Thus, the contents of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 18 to 22, main controller 110 selects a variation pattern, and in sound lamp controller 113, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on a variation pattern command from main controller 110. The mechanism to be determined will be described. In the variation pattern selection table 222a of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, variation pattern selection tables for determining the variation patterns of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set as shown in FIGS. Has been. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection table selected in the normal gaming state is shown, but it is also set in each of the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the time after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is measured by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the time data measured by the RTC 292, and the normal time of 54 minutes is measured. When the production period (mode A) is set and the normal production period elapses, a 1-minute preparation period (mode B) is set, and a 5-minute time production period (mode C) is set after the preparation period. The Although details of each period will be described later, even if the variation pattern command from the main controller 110 is the same, the variation pattern selected by the different period varies depending on the set period. Is set. Here, even if a different effect is set, the effect is composed of the change time indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the change time of each effect, the determination result, whether or not there is a rough change. The contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) are configured to be the same. By configuring in this way, main controller 110 does not need to determine an individual variation pattern, and can reduce control addition. Further, the data amount of the variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can also be suppressed.

  With reference to FIG. 18, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, each variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS <b> 1 corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol 1 that starts the variation and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 at the start of the variation. It becomes the composition to choose. Here, the variation pattern to be determined is a rough type and variation time of the variation pattern. Various variations of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as variation patterns to be selected when the common determination result of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is big hit. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and the determination result is correct, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. When the determination result is a win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of holdings. Here, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern that becomes “super reach” is set more easily than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the determination result is a win, the “super reach” variation pattern is executed and the frequency of the big win increases. When the “super reach” variation pattern is selected, the player wins the big hit. It is easy to have expectations.

  It should be noted that the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, which is a variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot, is subjected to a reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time. This is a variable display mode in which the variable display is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode after the variable display. The variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot is configured with a relatively short variation time compared to the variation pattern of the “super reach” jackpot described later.

  Super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are jackpot variation patterns of “super reach”, are displayed in the reach display mode, as in the case of normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, and then the characters are displayed, and the reach display mode is displayed. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in is executed. The variation pattern of “super reach” is configured with a variation time relatively longer than the variation pattern of “normal reach”.

  Next, as a variation pattern to be selected when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 is correct is out, as a variation pattern for detachment, “displace for a short time (for short time)”, “disconnect for a long time (for short time) ) ”,“ Normal reach miss ”, and“ Super reach miss ”. The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “short-time deviation”, is composed of a fluctuation time (800 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is displayed in the main display for a predetermined time without being displayed in the reach display mode. Is displayed in a variable manner, the display mode in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, is configured with a fluctuation time (12000 ms) longer than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach loss variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “normal reach loss”, is different from the normal reach jackpot variation pattern in that the middle symbol row Z2 is finally stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the reach display pattern. It is a display mode which shows that the constituted lottery result is out of place. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than a super reach deviation variation pattern, which will be described later, when the determination result is unacceptable. Moreover, the super reach loss variation pattern that is “super reach loss” is a display mode that is different from the various super reach jackpot variation patterns in that it is finally displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss.

  When the determination result of special symbol 1 is out of place, the variation pattern to be selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4 The variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratios of.

  When the number of reserves is 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the variation pattern of “deviating for a short time” and is not selected. Thereby, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the variation time of the selected variation pattern becomes relatively long, and during this time, it is easy to allow the game balls to enter the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, a large ratio is set for selecting a variation pattern of “deviating for a short time”. As a result, when the number of reserves is close to the upper limit number of 3 to 4, it is possible to select a short variation pattern so that even if the ball enters the first start port 64a, the number of invalid balls exceeds the number of reserves. The malfunction which becomes can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12B, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A selected when the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is started in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) will be described. When the determination result is a big hit, it is configured in the same manner as the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination is wrong, each variation pattern is divided into a variation type counter for the case where the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 and the case where the number of reserved symbols is 1 to 4. It is assigned and set corresponding to the value of CS1. Note that when the number of reserved symbols is 0, only the variation pattern for reach is set. Therefore, when the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol 2 is 0, the special symbol 2 always starts to vary. A variation pattern is selected. As a result, when the ball wins the second start port 64b per long time or normal hit, a variation pattern that reaches even when the ball is missed is selected whenever the number of reserves is zero. Therefore, the variation of the special symbol 2 is likely to reach the player, and the player can play the game with the expectation of the jackpot than the variation of the special symbol 1.

  Moreover, it is a structure in which a plurality of balls are likely to win a prize and a reserved ball is likely to be generated for a long time, and a special notice display effect is executed for each change of the reserved ball. In the last change of the reserved ball, the reach change pattern is always selected, so that a more fresh effect can be provided to the player.

  On the other hand, when the number of holdings is 1 to 4, if the result of the determination is wrong, only the fluctuation pattern of short-time deviation and long-term deviation is set, and the fluctuation pattern to reach is set. It has not been. By configuring in this way, the effect of whether or not the fluctuation when the reserved number becomes 0 is a big hit is displayed during the display of the variation pattern that starts changing when the reserved number is 1 to 4. It is possible to show a player a plurality of variations as if they are related effects. In addition, despite the out-of-range fluctuations, it is possible to have an expectation for the jackpot for the previous fluctuations.

  FIG. 12C shows a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table B for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol 2 in the short-time or high-probability gaming state (probability change).

  The normal winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the ordinary hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interruption process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is When the value of the winning random number set by the normal random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. Also, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A) is used for the normal symbol low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for a high high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. Further, the normal symbol hit type and the long hit per hour are set, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hit gaming state, the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is opened in the opening state in 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. Further, during the time reduction and the probability change period, the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is operated in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long hit is a hit in which the operation in which the electric accessory 64c is activated in the open state for two seconds regardless of the gaming state is repeated twice.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c executed in the probability variation period and the opening operation in the long time are set to be the same during the time reduction in the normal time. The opening operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, for 3 seconds, the opening operation may be performed once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ball enter the second starting port 64b more when hitting for a long time, and during normal games, it is possible to easily execute the variation display in the special symbol 2, The change of the game effect can be enjoyed by the player by the change display of the special symbol 2 in which the notice display with a fresh taste is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the value of the normal random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 20 at the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol normal hit It is determined that Further, if any of 21 to 28, it is determined that the normal symbol is about a long time. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is normal hit. It should be noted that when the normal symbol has a high probability, the normal symbol per hour is not set. However, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the opening operation of the electric accessory 64c is the same as that for a long time. The hit is substantially the same as the hit for a long time.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 64c is operated can be lowered, and the frequency of entering the second starting port 64b can be reduced. Therefore, it is centered on making the ball enter the first start port 64a, and the player's consumption of the game ball can be increased, and the profit on the game store side can be increased. On the other hand, in the short time and the probability variation period where the probability is high, the opportunity to operate the electric accessory 64c can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the chance to enter the second starting port 64b is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state advantageous to the player while suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball. Therefore, a player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play a game for a longer time.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is determined. As shown in FIG. If the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is “5 to 20”, the second start port 64b is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” as normal hit. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second start port 64b is opened only "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened. If the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is “21 to 28”, the second start port 64b is opened “2 seconds × 2 times” for a long time.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17A). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol). As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second start port 64b is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second start port 64b is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times” is very long, so that the ball easily enters the second start port 64b. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second start port 64b is opened for “2 seconds × twice” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). The update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 16, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 42), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a number-of-releases counter 203h, a long-time release flag 203i, a time-shortage counter 203j, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal hit random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first starting port 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first start port 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 33).

  The value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the held ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 33 and S405 in FIG. 35). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second starting port 64b, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 38).

  If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 39, S703: No).

  The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of opening times of the electric approximator 64c.

  The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric approximator 64c.

  The long-time release flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long-time hit is being made. The long-time release flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S629 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Although not shown in the figure, it is set to OFF based on the fact that the normal symbol per hour has ended. Specifically, in the process of S1105 of the electric accessory release process (FIG. 43, S1005) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the release number counter 203g is 0. .

  The hour / minute counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203j has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the number of the hour / medium counter 203j.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 23A, a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A), a prefetch effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24C). )), A pre-reading effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24C to 24D), a notice selection table 222e (see FIGS. 25A to 25B), and a touch notice selection table (see FIG. 26A). ) Is stored. Also, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and the fluctuation start Flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, normal winning information storage area 223g, sub long time opening flag 223h, opening effect flag 223i, hold effect counter 223j, effect counter 223k, time effect execution flag 223m, setting Time storage area 223n, preparation period flag 223o, start period flag 223p, SW effective time counter 223q, sensor effective time counter 223r, touch counter 223s, background mode storage area 223t, variation counter 223u, SW counter 223v Directing mode storage area 223w, addition command storage area 223X, addition command reception flag 223Y, other memory areas 223z are at least provided.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 61) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first start port 64a is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 61).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display a power-on main image (not shown). It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is generated, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 even though the changing effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the frame buffers of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, the first starting port 64a is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters the ball, so that the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second starting port. As it becomes easier to enter 64b, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 28). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 30 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 30).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the case of the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 61). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3505 in FIG. 71 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 63B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 63 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 37 to 41) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3401 in FIG. 71A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 71B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, describing the contents of drawing instructions is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 63 (b) ) (See S2303), pointer update processing (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 31), and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 31, the back image used for one frame image, the third symbol (design 1, Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 63 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 72). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 72). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 63B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 73).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 43. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 299, 99, and 239, respectively). When it reaches, each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first start port 64a is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process of S213 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the processing of S208 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. A special symbol lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2 Whether it will be A or big hit B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), it is determined which of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type (S217). If the jackpot is B, 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203j of the RAM 203 (S218). Thereafter, the process of S220 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability change period (S219). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S220), and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 1 or more (S221), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 1. If it is above (S221: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203e (S222), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203j is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 33) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “extra special symbol” is performed. It is the process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the variation production performed by the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81 while performing.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, each of the special symbol random number counter C1 and the special symbol type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively. A value is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability (S303). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, and 299 ”are set, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these hits When the random number value matches, it is determined that the bonus symbol is a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. Three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol jackpots, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits these, It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, and the two types of special big hits (big hit A, big hit) In B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), “60 to 99” If it is in the range of "", it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, normal symbol time short period 100 times).

  In the processing of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies voice lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode within the same variation time. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. ing. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol and stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 being set, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  Next, the addition command set in the variation pattern selection table 202b is set corresponding to the selected variation pattern (S310). As shown in FIG. 82, this addition command is determined on the basis of the result of determination of success / failure, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 19, the addition command is composed of a fixed time and an addition time, and indicates the addition time. In the present embodiment, with respect to the variation pattern that becomes super reach, the fixed time is configured with a variation time similar to that of a short time deviation, and the addition time is configured with a time other than the fixed time. By configuring in this way, in the fixed time, the variation time until reaching the reach display mode can be set with the same variation time as the short-time deviation, and the addition command can be used to display characters such as super reach from the reach display mode. Can be set based on. Therefore, since the variable display mode having a long variable time can be divided and set for display, the control load at the start of the fluctuation can be reduced.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S307 or S309 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 42). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 32), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first starting port 64a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first start opening 64a (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  If there is no winning at the first starting port 64a (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first starting port 64a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first starting port 64a (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 retained ball The value (N) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 42) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are used as special symbols in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the one holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, about S407-S413, about each process of S401-S406 demonstrated above, the process with respect to having won the 1st starting port 64a is changed into the process with respect to having won the 2nd starting port 64b, Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. Note that when a game ball is won at the second starting port 64b and stored as a holding ball, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are acquired and the corresponding special symbol 2 is obtained. It is stored in the empty holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b.

  In this way, by acquiring the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 similar to the special symbol 1 for the special symbol 2 based on the entrance to the second starting port 64b, the special symbol 2 is obtained. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number between the symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant for both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  After performing the process of S413, a prefetch process is performed (S414). Details of the look-ahead process (S414) will be described with reference to FIG. 36, but based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. Thus, a process for determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of variation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. In addition, a part of the counters (for example, only the variation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of the variation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the determination of success / failure is acquired at the time of entering the ball, and a counter not related to the determination of success / failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining fairness of the game Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the prefetching process (S414) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S414).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 36, S414), first, determination of whether or not to start the change is made based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (S421). The determination of whether or not the change starts is a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area indicating whether the game state at the start of change is a normal game state (low probability) or a probability change game state (high probability game state). The determination is made based on whether or not the counter value stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is variably displayed and the hit type.

  In the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of S421 is a win (S422). When it is determined that the determination result is a win (S422: Yes), it is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 whether the hit type is a big hit A (S423). When it is determined that the hit type is jackpot A (S423: Yes), a winning command indicating the jackpot A is set (S424). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S423: No), a winning command indicating that the jackpot B is set is set (S425). Also, in the process of S422, when it is determined that the determined result of the determination is not good (S422: No), a winning prize command is set (S426).

  As described above, since the result of the determination of whether or not prior to the start of the fluctuation is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a holding ball is established, the sound lamp control device 113 The success / failure determination result and its hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can change the player's advance notice determination result for the hold ball to the player based on the winning command (for example, the color of the hold symbol can be changed to a color for notifying the determination result). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination of the success / failure in the holding ball. In addition, since the winning command is output as one winning command for the holding ball every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the holding ball.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second start port 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 64c.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the second symbol display device 83 is in the middle of the display indicating the hit, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, a normal symbol variation start process is executed (S608), and this process ends. The normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S637 or the process of S638 of FIG. 38 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S609 (S609: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S609 (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S627 or S631 of FIG. In the device 83, a stop display (lighting display) is set. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S635 of FIG. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S627 of FIG. 38, the processing of S631 or the processing of S635.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S611). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S611: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is set (S612), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process of S612, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S630 or the process of S634 in FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the process of S612 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (S608). In the normal symbol variation start process (S608), the normal symbol variation start setting executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is set. This is a process for execution.

  It is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S621). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S621: Yes), the process proceeds to S624.

  In the process of S621, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S621: No), it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time is short (S622). If there is neither a certain change nor a short time (S622: No), the process proceeds to S624.

  If the probability change or the time is short (S622: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, the normal hit acquired in the process of S607 in FIG. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S623). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 17A).

  In the process of S624, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 in FIG. Based on the low probability normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17A), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S624). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 17A). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is within the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal hit of the normal symbol, and if within the range of “21 to 28”, the normal symbol of the normal symbol is determined. If it is determined that it is a long time, and it is within the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, it is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 17A).

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because, during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting opening 64b is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second start opening 64b as much as possible. The special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second starting port 64b. Therefore, even if it is suppressed that a ball enters the second starting port 64b during the big hit of the special symbol, the second starting port Many balls enter 64b. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second start port 64b becomes maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S623 or S624 is a normal symbol win (S625), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S625: Yes) Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol hit type is for a long time (S626). If it is determined that the normal symbol hit type is long-time hit (S626: Yes), the display mode for long-time hit is set (S627). In the process of S627, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a start command per long time is set (S627), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (S629). Then, the process proceeds to S630.

  If it is determined in the process of S626 that the normal symbol hit type is normal hit (S626: No), the normal hit display mode is set (S631). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a probability change or time saving (S632).

  If the probability change or the time is short (S632: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S633). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S633: Yes), the process proceeds to S634. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second starting port 64b as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 64c are set.

  In the process of S633, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S633: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second starting port 64b is set to 2 seconds and the number of opening is set to 2 times. (S630), and the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S630, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of S632, if there is no probability change or time saving (S632: No), the process proceeds to S634. In the process of S632, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 64c associated with the second start port 64b is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S634), and the process proceeds to S636. In the process of S634, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

  In the process of S625, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S625: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S635). In the process of S635, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S636.

  In the process of S636, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (S636). If the probability change is in progress (S636: Yes), the change time of the change display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S637). This process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S636 is not in the process of being surely changed (S636: No), the fluctuation display fluctuation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S638), and this process ends. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second start port 64b becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second start port 64b.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening for a long time are the same as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probabilistic state and the short time state, but not limited to this, the opening time and the number of times of opening are different. You may comprise so that it may set.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703). : No), the process proceeds to S706. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and the process proceeds to S706. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S706, whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate at the start of the change is determined based on the acquired value of the normal random number counter C4 (S706), and the process proceeds to S707. In the process of S707, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a hit (S707).

  If it is determined in the processing of S707 that the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a win (S707: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a hit type for a long time (S708). If it is determined that the hit type of the normal symbol winning / failing determination result is per long time (S708: Yes), a long time regular symbol winning command is set (S709), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S708 that the hit type of the normal symbol winning / failing determination result is normal winning (S708: No), a winning symbol winning command is set (S710).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S707 that the normal symbol winning / determining determination result is unacceptable (S707: No), an unrecognized common figure winning command is set (S711), and this process is terminated.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S913. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), a state command is transmitted based on the long-time release flag 203i (S908). Next, the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 32) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 33) or the start winning process (see FIG. 35) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process or the prefetch process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c attached to the second start port 64b is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the processing of S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S630 in FIG. 38 or the processing of S634 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed. The details of the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 34), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) or the process of S310 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 34). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S637 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 38) or the processing of S638, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S610 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 37), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S627 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 38) or the processing of S631. (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated by using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). The initial value of the normal random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory release process (S1005). The electric accessory release process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64c is set by the process in S612 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 37). In this case, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64c is performed.

  In the electric combination release process, first, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 64c is being opened (S1101). If it is determined that the electric accessory 64c is being opened (S1101: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c depending on whether the opening time counter 203h is 0 (S1102). If it is determined that it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1102: Yes), the electric accessory 64c is set to be closed (S1103), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1102 that it is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1102: No), the opening time counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S1104), and this processing ends. As a result, 1 can be subtracted at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), so that the time can be accurately measured from the value set in the process of S1109.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the electric accessory 64c is not being opened (S1101: No), it is determined whether the opening count counter 203g is greater than 1 (S1105). When the number-of-releases counter 203g is 0 (S1105: No), this process ends. If the opening number counter 203g is larger than 1 (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106). If it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: No), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1106 that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 64c (S1106: Yes), the opening counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S1107), and the opening of the electric accessory 64c is set (S1108). A value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h (S1109), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 60, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 44, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the current power-off process in S1318 is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 46). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 46), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 46). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). This status command indicates whether the normal symbol is being hit for a long time based on the long-time release flag 203i in the processing of S908 of the startup processing (see FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. It is a command. If it is determined in step S1212 that a status command has been received (S1212: Yes), the sub long open flag 223h is set based on the received status command (S1213). Here, when the received status command indicates that the long time is being hit, the sub long time release flag 223h is turned on. Set 223h to off.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, a command that can determine whether or not a normal symbol is being hit for a long time is output from the main control device 110, so that the voice lamp control device 113 side can also determine the state. Can do.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1214, a time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the time setting process (S1214), which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not the time effect is to be executed. If the setting is to execute the time effect, the time information is acquired from the RTC 292. Then, based on the time information, a process for setting the preparation period and the time effect period in the set time storage area 223n is executed.

In the time setting process (FIG. 45, S1214), first, it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is set to “1” or “3” (S1221). When it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is not the setting “1” or the setting “3” (S1221: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting of the setting switch 291 is the setting “1” or the setting “3” (S1221: Yes), time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1222).
As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. Note that the RTC 292 is a timing unit having a battery inside, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function and is configured to be able to determine “year / month / day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas, or to control to display a special character such as Santa.

  It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (S1223). Here, in this embodiment, the term data is set to three years within three and a half years, which is the capacity of the internal battery of the RTC 292. A date three years after the date set in advance at the time of manufacture is set as the time limit data, and when it is determined that the date is after that date, the time effect setting is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that a delay or the like occurs in time due to a lack of battery capacity or the like, and the start timing of the time effect cannot be synchronized between the pachinko machines 10.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the date is three years after the date preset at the time of manufacture, and to set the time effect execution flag 223m described later to ON. When the voltage value of the battery supplying power to the RTC 292 is determined and the voltage value is equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or higher), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON. Also good. Here, it is desirable to set the RTC 292 to a voltage value that allows normal operation.

  In the process of S1223, when it is determined that the acquired time information is out of the time limit data, that is, three years or more have passed (S1223: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is within the time limit data, that is, within three years (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

  In the present embodiment, the preparation period and the time effect period for 24 hours are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n based on the acquired time information. It is also possible to set 54 minutes to execute the game, measure the period by counting down or counting up, and set the preparation period based on the passage of 54 minutes. In addition, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the change display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, a prefetch effect selection process is executed (S1313). Details of the prefetch effect selection process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the pre-reading effect process (S1313), the process of the synchronous effect management process (S1314) is executed. Details of the synchronized effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1314 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1315). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1315: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown flag are turned on (S1317), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1318). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1316: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When a variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), variation pattern reception processing is executed (S1402). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the fluctuation pattern reception processing (S1402) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern reception process.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process (S1402), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1421), and the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (S1422), a process of selecting a variation pattern or a notice effect is executed based on the set effect mode.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, the variation pattern selection process (S1422) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1422). In the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422), first, the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1431). It is determined whether or not the effect mode set in effect mode storage area 223w is effect mode A (S1432). If it is determined that the production mode A is set (S1432: Yes), the result of the determination of the success / failure, the number of reserved items and the variation type counter CS1 from the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table A (FIG. 18 or FIG. 21). Based on the value, the variation pattern is selected and set (S1433). Thereafter, the notice effect display is selected and set based on the result of the determination of the success / failure and the value of the effect counter 223k from the notice selection table A (see FIG. 25A) (S1434). It is selected and set from the touch advance notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1435).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1432 that the effect mode A is not set (S1432: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B is set (S1436). If it is determined that the production mode B is set (S1436: Yes), the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table B of the corresponding special symbol (see FIG. 20A or FIG. 22A). Is set (S1437).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1436 that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode C is set (S1436: No), the corresponding special symbol variation pattern selection table C (FIG. 20 (b) or FIG. 22 (b)), the variation pattern is selected and set (S1438). A notice effect display is selected and set from the notice selection table C (S1439). The notice effect display is selected and set from the touch notice selection table 222f (see FIG. 26A) (S1440).

  In this way, the selected variation pattern can be switched based on the set effect mode. Further, the selected variation pattern is the same as the variation time specified by the variation pattern command by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the result of the determination, and the content of the effect display displayed and the reach display mode at the variation time. (Normal reach, super reach, or its type) is changed and selected by the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the determination result regarding the profit of the player and the variation time related to gambling are not changed according to the one determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and therefore, according to the predetermined design value of the pachinko machine 10. Can play games.

  The notice effect is also determined based on the determination result at the start of change, the contents of the change pattern (normal reach, super reach, etc.), and the value of the effect counter 223k. There is no need for processing, and the control load can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the timing for displaying the notice is determined in advance by the variation pattern, and the display control device 114 displays the notice at that timing by setting a display notice display command for indicating the timing. To be set.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is executed, the hold effect selection process is executed (S1423). In the hold effect selection process (S1423), a process of setting a notice effect to be displayed with respect to the start of fluctuation of the hold ball won in the second start port 64b for a long time is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the hold effect selection process (S1423) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the hold effect selection process (S1423).

  In the hold effect lottery process (FIG. 50, S1423), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1451). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is 0 or less (S1451: No), is the hold ball that starts the change being the start of change of the hold ball whose release effect flag 223i is set to on? It is determined (S1452). If it is determined that the change of the reserved ball for which the release effect flag 223i is set to on is started (S1452: Yes), the release effect flag 223i is set in accordance with the number of reserved balls for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON. The value of the effect counter 223j is set (S1453). Here, the release effect flag 223i is based on the long time of the normal symbol so that the holding ball formed by opening the electric accessory 64c and entering the second start port 64b can be distinguished. This flag is set to ON in response to the holding ball. In the process of S1453, for example, if the number of reserved balls for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON is 3, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is set to 3. On the other hand, in the process of S1452, when it is determined that the change of the holding ball in which the release effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S1452: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S1451, if it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223j is greater than 0 (S1451: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1454). Based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223k, a notice effect display mode corresponding to the value of the hold effect counter 223j is selected from the hold effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 24A) and set (S1455).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the hold effect selection table 222b has a hold effect for each of the determination results of whether or not the start of variation or the determination result of the hold ball whose release effect flag 223i is set to ON. Corresponding to the value of the counter 223j, each notice effect display is set by the value of the effect counter 223k. Therefore, each notice effect display mode is determined based on the determination result, the value of the effect counter 223k, and the value of the hold effect counter 223j.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 21), even when the result of the determination is wrong, if the number of held balls is zero, Since the variation pattern of “out of reach” is set to be selected, when “1” indicating that the number of held balls indicated by the holding effect counter 223j is “0”, a notice display mode such as “large chance” is displayed. Is configured to be more easily selected than the case where the value of the hold effect counter 223j is “2 to 4”, and is configured to give the player more expectation of the jackpot.

  Therefore, when the player enters the second starting port 64b for a long time, a continuous effect is executed between the reserved balls, and the reach is always displayed in the last change. It is possible to play a game with a higher expectation than a lottery that enters the first starting port 64a (a lottery that enters the first starting port 64a in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the player can play a game with a higher expectation of occurrence per long time, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  When the process of S1455 is executed, a display notice display command for display that instructs the third symbol display device 81 to display the notice effect display set in the process of S1455 is set (generated) (S1456). Thereafter, the value of the hold effect counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1457), and this process ends.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the hold effect selection process (FIG. 50, S1423) is executed, the hold number transfer process is executed (S1424). In the number-of-holds transfer process (S1424), if the special symbol 2 is variably displayed, it indicates that the ball is a hold ball that has been established based on the opening of the electric accessory 64c based on the long time of the normal symbol. A process of shifting the release effect flag 223i to the area indicating the previous hold number is executed for the hold ball in which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the reservation number shifting process (S1424) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the reserved number shifting process (S1424). In the number-of-holds migration process (FIG. 51, S1424), first, it is determined whether or not it is a change start opportunity of special symbol 2 (special diagram 2) (S1461). If it is determined that it is the trigger for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 (S1461: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved ball for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462). If it is determined that there is no reserved ball for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1462: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved balls for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON are stored (S1462: Yes), the release effect flag 223i corresponding to each number of reserved balls is held one by one in advance. It is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the number of balls (S1463). On the other hand, in the process of S1461, when it is determined that it is a change start opportunity of the special symbol 1 (S1461: No), this process ends.

  The release effect flag 223i is individually set corresponding to each of the reserved balls 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 and the execution area, and is set to ON for the held ball that has been established for a long time. The When the notice effect display corresponding to the digestion of the reserved ball is set as the reserved ball is digested, the release effect flag 223i is also shifted to the area corresponding to the previous reserved ball. Therefore, it can be accurately determined whether or not the ball is a holding ball that has been established for a long time.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After executing the number-of-holds migration process (S1424), the variation counter 223u is incremented by 1 (S1425), and this process ends. The fluctuation number counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is reset to 0 which is an initial value when the power is cut off.

  In the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is configured. However, the number of fluctuations is not limited to this, and a dedicated backup power source is provided even when the power is turned off. The clock data may be acquired by the RTC 292 so that the number of fluctuations per day can be identified. When the time data is periodically acquired from the RTC 292 and the date is updated, the value of the variation counter 223u is stored in the storage area corresponding to the date, and then the value of the variation counter 223u is the initial value. A configuration for resetting to 0 is conceivable.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S1401 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 54) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when a reserved ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), a held ball number command reception process is executed (S1407). In the reserved ball number command reception process (S1407), based on the received reserved ball number command, the stored ball numbers are respectively stored in the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. To determine whether the normal symbol is being hit for a long time, and when it is being hit for a long time, the release effect flag 223i is turned on for the newly stored reserved ball of the special symbol 2 Execute the process set to. In the process of S1407, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114 is set. After the process of S1407 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1407) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command receiving process (S1407).

  In the reserved ball number command receiving process (FIG. 52, S1407), first, the number of held balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are respectively extracted. The number of reserved balls is set (S1471). Next, it is determined whether or not the sub long open flag 223h is on (S1472). If it is determined that the sub long-time release flag 223h is on (S1472: Yes), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command for the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command for the special symbol 2 has been received (S1473: Yes), the release effect flag 223i for the corresponding reserved ball number is set to ON (S1474). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1472 that the sub long-time release flag 223h is off (S1472: No), or when it is determined in the process of S1473 that the reserved ball number command for the special symbol 2 has not been received. (S1473: No), this processing is terminated.

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 are the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, the special symbol. 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114 is displayed. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the process of S1406, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1408). When a winning command is received (S1408: Yes), winning command reception processing is executed (S1409), and winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S1410). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process. As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are respectively stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b. Further, as soon as each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original value of each of the counters C1 to C2 is obtained from the original value separately from the big special lottery drawing of the special symbol. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the winning command receiving process (S1409) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S1409). In the winning command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub long time release flag 223h is ON, that is, whether or not the long time is being hit (S1481). If it is determined that the sub long open flag 223h is off (S1481: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub long open flag 223h is on (S1481: Yes), it is determined whether a special symbol 2 winning command has been received (S1482).

  If it is determined in the process of S1482 that the special symbol 2 winning command has not been received (S1482: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command for the special symbol 2 is received (S1482: Yes), the release effect flag 223i corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set to ON (S1483).

  Here, the opening effect flag 223i is set for each holding area and execution area. Therefore, the release effect flag 223i corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the received special symbol 2 winning command is set to ON. As a result, it is possible to distinguish and identify the reserved sphere stored for a long time and other reserved spheres.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the process of S1408, if a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a normal symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1411). When it is determined that the normal symbol winning command is received (S1411), the normal symbol winning information indicated by the received winning command is set in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1412). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the main controller 110 acquires the value of the normal hit random number counter C4, and the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is the normal value. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203f. Further, as soon as the value of the normal hit counter C4 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is performed from the acquired value of the normal random number counter C4 separately from the original normal symbol win lottery. In this case, various information obtained in the event of pre-reading is predicted (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a normal symbol winning command including various types of information (whether or not, winning type) obtained by prefetching is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol winning command is not received in the processing of S1411 (S1411: No), it is determined whether an addition command is received (S1413). If it is determined that the addition command has been received (S1413: Yes), the information indicated by the received addition command is set in the addition command storage area 223x (S1414). The addition command reception flag 223y is set to ON (S1415).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1413 that an addition command has not been received (S1413: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1416), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S1505. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 49) S1433, S1437, and S1438 is performed. In any process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1505.

  In the processing of S1505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1505). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1505: No), the processing of S1510 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. Obtain (S1507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509.

  In the processing of S1509, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1509). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1509 is executed, the process proceeds to S1510.

  In the processing of S1510, it is determined whether or not the addition command reception flag 223y is on (S1510). It is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 (S1511). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 (S1511: Yes), the display effect content is determined based on the received addition information based on the set background mode (S1512). ). Thereafter, a display addition command is set based on the set display effect content (S1513).

  Here, in the processing of S1512, the display effect content corresponding to the information indicated by the received addition command and the set background mode is selected and set. This display content is set in the variation pattern selection table 222a. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol 1 is determined, the determination result is wrong, the number of holdings is 2, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 160, as shown in FIG. From 110, “A1B4” is output as the variation pattern command, and “B0B2” is output as the addition command. The sound lamp control device 113 determines a display mode at a fixed time corresponding to each background mode based on the variation pattern command, and outputs the command to the display control device 114. Thereafter, after the SW effective time has elapsed, only the display mode corresponding to the set background mode is output to the display control device 114 so as to be set at the start of the addition time.

  In the above-described example, when the underwater background mode is selected when the SW valid time becomes 0, the variation display mode after the reach display mode (after the addition time) of the super reach deviation variation pattern A1 is set. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, a chance effect (see FIG. 13A) is set. In addition, when the beach background mode is selected, display modes after the reach display mode of the super reach deviation variation pattern A2 are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, a continuous effect (see FIG. 13B) is set.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce processing for setting data and the like necessary for starting the change of the special symbol set at the start of the change. Furthermore, even when it is necessary to set different display modes corresponding to a plurality of background modes, display data corresponding to each background mode is set for a period including a time that can be switched by the player. In the subsequent period, display data corresponding to the set background mode has only to be set, so that it is possible to reduce the control processing necessary for the special symbol variation display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the prefetch effect selection process (S1313) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 46) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect selection processing (S1313). In this prefetch effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), a process for selecting (determining) the notice effect display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the prefetch results of the normal symbol and the special symbol.

  In the pre-reading effect selection process (FIG. 55, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set (S1601). The determination whether the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is set is executed by determining whether the pre-reading effect is selected and the display period is set. Note that a special flag is set, and the flag is set to ON based on the fact that the prefetch effect is selected, and is controlled to be turned off when the display of the prefetch effect is completed. You may comprise so that it may discriminate | determine whether the production is set.

  If it is determined in the process of S1601 that the normal symbol pre-reading effect is set (S1601: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect of the normal symbol is not set (S1601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol hold for a long time is stored in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1602). . If it is determined that the normal symbol holding for a long time is stored in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the long-time opening effect (S1603).

  The long-time opening effect is a symbol schematically showing the electric accessory 64c by opening the door displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. This is a notice effect that is displayed and informed in advance that the electric utility item 64c will be released for a long time. The timing for starting the long-time opening effect is three seconds before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a long time. In this way, by configuring so as to display the opening effect for a long time from 3 seconds before the long time, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the opening of the electric accessory 64c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to easily enter the second starting port 64b from being missed. In addition, the player can play the game in the hope that the opening effect will be executed for a long time, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  In the process of S1603, when it is determined that it is not the timing to execute the long-time opening effect (S1603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to execute a long-time opening effect (S1603: Yes), the start of the opening effect is set (S1604). A display opening effect command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the long time opening effect shown in FIGS. 5A to 6A on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1605). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol holding for a long time is not stored in the normal winning information storage area 223g (S1602: No), it is determined whether it is a pre-reading effect executable period. (S1606). Here, the pre-reading effect executable period is a period in which the opening effect is not being executed for a long time and the jackpot gaming state is not performed. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect executable period is set as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate.

  In the process of S1606, when it is determined that it is not the pre-reading effect executable period (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the pre-reading effect executable period (S1606: Yes), whether the special symbol or the normal symbol hold is stored is stored as a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter Judgment is made based on the value of the normal holding ball number counter 223c (S1607). If it is determined that there is no special symbol or normal symbol hold (S1607: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol or the normal symbol is on hold (S1607: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and the prefetch effect is executed from the prefetch effect lottery table 222c (see FIG. 24B). A lottery for determining whether to perform or not is executed (S1608). Here, in the pre-reading effect lottery table 222c (FIG. 24B), when a holding ball that is a big hit is stored in the special design holding ball, the holding ball that is a big hit is stored in the special design holding ball. The probability of lottery with a pre-reading effect is set higher than when there is no reserved ball with no special symbol (special symbol). Therefore, the player can predict in advance the success / failure determination result of the special symbol based on the frequency at which the pre-reading effect is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only the content of the pre-reading effect but also determining the frequency.

  It is determined whether the lottery result in S1608 has a pre-reading effect (S1609). If it is determined that the lottery result indicates no prefetching (S1609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result has a pre-reading effect (S1609: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired and from the pre-reading effect selection table 222d (see FIGS. 24C to 24D). A prefetch effect is selected (S1610). A display prefetch effect command indicating the selected prefetch effect is set (S1611).

  Here, the pre-reading effect selection table 222d has only a pre-reading effect lottery table (FIG. 24C) and a normal symbol hold for selecting a pre-reading effect when there is a holding ball of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. In this case, a prefetch effect lottery table (FIG. 24D) for selecting a prefetch effect is formed. When there is a special design holding ball, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), a door displayed on the third symbol display device 81 showing a sign (notice) of whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed is displayed. The number of productions that vibrate slightly is set, after which the door is opened and a comment is displayed therein. This comment is a notice display mode for letting the player predict the lottery result of the special design holding ball, indicating that the lottery result is a win (bonus), “Done!” Or “Congratulations! And a character such as “chance!” And “great chance!” That are easier to select than the case of losing in the case of winning is selected based on the value of the production counter 223k. Has been.

  With this configuration, the player can predict or determine the lottery result of the special symbol in advance with a comment displayed when the door is opened. Therefore, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has a low expectation for the jackpot, it can be enjoyed with the content displayed by the pre-reading effect, and the game can be enjoyed early. You can prevent getting bored.

  Further, when there is no special symbol hold (when only a normal symbol hold), as shown in FIG. 24D, only the door vibration effect is selected. When the opening effect is executed for a long time, the door vibration effect is executed twice. Therefore, when the effect of two door vibrations is selected, the player expects that the door is opened and the opening effect is executed for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation for the long-time opening effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), since the door opening effect is executed and the comment is displayed whenever the door vibration effect is executed three or more times, If the door continuously vibrates, count the number of times and expect the door to open. Further, when the door vibration is executed four times, it is configured to be executed only when a special ball holding ball is stored in the special symbol holding ball. By being executed, the jackpot can be predicted at an early stage. Further, when the door vibration is executed, it is possible to expect the player to vibrate four times and to give the player a sense of exhilaration (exciting feeling).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the synchronous effect management process (S1314) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 46) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronous production management process (S1314), a process of acquiring time information from the RTC 292, determining whether it is a preparation period or a time production period based on the time information, and setting a production mode indicating it. Run.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 56, S1314), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1701). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is off (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223m is on (S1701: Yes), time information “hour, minute” is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1702). It is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o indicating that the preparation period is in progress is on (S1703). If it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1703: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1702 is the time effect period set in the set time storage area 223n (S1704). ). If it is determined that it is not the time effect period (S1704: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the time effect period (S1704: Yes), the preparation period flag 223o is set to OFF (S1705). The start period flag 223p is set to ON (S1706). The production mode C is set in the production mode storage area 223w (S1707). Thereafter, the effect variation process is executed (S1708), and this process ends.

  Here, the effect changing process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect changing process (S1708). In this effect changing process (FIG. 57, S1708), if the success / failure determination result is true for the changing special symbol in response to the transition from the preparation period to the time effect period, the special fish group is displayed in the third symbol display. This is a process for executing the process of displaying on the device 81 and informing in advance that it is a big hit. Here, the special fish school is a notice effect display in which red fish swarms from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the notice announcement display of the normal fish school is composed of blue fish, and notifies the player that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high.

  In the effect changing process (FIG. 57, S1708), first, it is determined whether the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is changing (S1721). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1721: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1721: Yes), it is determined whether or not the determination result of the changing special symbol is a big hit (S1722). When it is determined that the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a jackpot (S1722: Yes), a display notice display command for displaying the display of the special fish school is set (S1723). On the other hand, in the process of S1722, when it is determined that the result of the determination is wrong (S1722: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the transition is made from the preparation period to the time production start period, the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is changing is notified in advance by the special fish school. It is possible to display a notice effect that is advantageous to the user. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the time production period is a period advantageous to the player, and it is possible to play a game while looking forward to the time production period. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was set as the structure which alert | reports a success / failure determination in advance by shifting to a time production period from a preparation period, but it is not restricted to this, For example, when it is a jackpot, when the determination result is notified In addition, it may be configured to execute a process of switching so as to always stop and display with the symbol that notifies the big hit B. Then, during the jackpot game executed in the time effect period, the jackpot type may be configured to execute whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A. With such a configuration, even if the time effect period becomes a big hit game, a special effect can be provided to the player, and the player can be more entertained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the pending number display update process (S1306), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the reserved number display update process (S1306).

  In the number-of-holds display update process (FIG. 58, S1306), it is first determined whether or not the number of symbols on hold has changed (S1801). If it is determined that there is no change in the reserved symbol (S1801: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a change in the number of reserved symbols (S1801: Yes), it is determined whether there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802). When it is determined that there is a reserved ball of the special symbol 2 for which the opening effect flag 223i is set to ON (S1802: Yes), the corresponding special reserved symbol (in this embodiment, a star-shaped reserved symbol) and others A display hold command indicating a hold symbol of (a hold ball other than the release effect flag 223i being turned on) is set (S1803). On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, if all the opening effect flags 223i are off (S1802: No), the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are set. Based on this, a hold command for display indicating a hold symbol to be displayed is set (S1804).

  In this way, by determining whether there is a reserved ball for which the release effect flag 223i is set to ON, the reserved symbol of the reserved ball can be changed to a special symbol different from the normal symbol and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the reserved ball has won the second starting port 64b per long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 59, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not it is in a standby state in which a demonstration screen is displayed (S1901). If it is determined that the standby state is set (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (S1902). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is set to "1" or "2" (S1903). When it is determined that the setting switch 291 is set to “1” or “2” (S1903: Yes), the display variation for notifying the display controller 114 of the number of variations indicated by the value of the variation counter 223u. The number command is set (S1904). Thereafter, the process of S1905 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that it is not in the standby state (S1901: No), the process of S1905 is executed.

  In the process of S1905, a sensor input process is executed (S1905). Here, the sensor input process (S1905) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (S1905) which is a process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the sensor input process (FIG. 60, S1905), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223r is set to a value greater than 0 (S1921). When it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223r is a value equal to or less than 0 (S1921: No), it is determined whether the notice effect display is set (S1922). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (S1922: Yes), the sensor valid time set as the notice effect display is set in the sensor valid time counter 223r (S1923). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1922 that the notice effect display is not set (S1922: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1921 that the sensor effective time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1921: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (S1924). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has operated the touch sensor 290 with a hand or the like (S1925). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S1925: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926). When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 10 seconds or more (S1926: Yes), it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (during the time effect period) (S1927). When it is determined that the production mode is C (S1927: Yes), the process of S1928 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the production mode is other than the production mode C (S1927: No), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1926, when it is determined that the sensor valid time counter 223r is 10 seconds or less (S1926: No), the process of S1928 is executed. In the process of S1928, the value of the touch counter 223s is incremented by 1 (S1928), and a display preview display command corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223s is set (S1929). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value set for the selected touch advance notice display (S1930). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is the upper limit value (S1930: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223s is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1931). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223s is not the upper limit value (S1930: No), this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. After the sensor input process (S1905) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is a value greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time is in effect (S1906). If it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223q is 0 or less, that is, it is not within the SW valid time (S1906: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S1907). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1907: No), the process of S1914 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1908).

  If it is determined in step S1908 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1908: No), the value of the SW counter 223v is incremented by 1 (S1909). The value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1910). Thereafter, it is determined whether the SW counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911). When it is determined that the value of the SW number counter 223v is equal to or less than the upper limit value (S1911: No), the process of S1914 is executed.

  When it is determined that the value of the SW number counter 223v is larger than the upper limit value (S1911: Yes), a special effect lottery is executed (S1912). A display notice command for display indicating the notice effect determined by the lottery is set (S1913). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1914. In the process of S1914, it is determined whether a new variation pattern has been set (S1914). If it is determined that a new variation pattern has been set (S1914: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223q based on the set variation pattern (S1915). On the other hand, if it is determined in S1914 that a new variation pattern has not been set (S1914: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S1906, when it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223q is a value greater than 0 (S1906: Yes), the value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW valid time counter 223q and updated. (S1916). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1917). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1917: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1917: Yes), it is determined whether the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1918).

  In the process of S1918, when it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is on (S1918: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the preparation period flag 223o is off (S1918: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223t (S1919). A display switching command to a variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (S1920). Then, this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 73, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 61). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 61) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 62, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 71A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 71A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning prize) to the first start port 64a, and the start instruction of the variation effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 63B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 31) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 63B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, the process corresponding to the command is executed, the display demo command, When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp controller 113, the image controller 237 is notified of the continuous notice A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. 31 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is executed. Migrate to

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302), as shown in FIG. 64, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command. (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 65A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, it is determined whether the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501). In the variation pattern selected in the production mode A, a plurality of background modes are set. In the variation pattern selected in the production mode B and the production mode C, only one type of background mode is set. .

  In the present embodiment, in the effect mode B and the effect mode C, one background mode is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of background modes may be set in the same manner as the effect mode A.

  In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the received variation pattern is a variation pattern for which a plurality of background modes are not set (S2501: No), a display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and the display data table is determined. The buffer is set (S2502). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the received variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a plurality of background modes are set (S2501: Yes), a display data table corresponding to each background mode is determined. Is set in the display data table buffer (S2503). The display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 233k is set to active (S2504). Thereafter, the process of S2505 is executed.

  Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and the set display data tables can be processed by moving the pointer in synchronization. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers to active and switching.

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2502 or S2503 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2505). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the set variation display data table is turned on, and other variation display data tables are also displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to OFF (S2506). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2506, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2507), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialization is performed (S2508). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2509), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing in S2508 is updated, and the pointer 233f is changed from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The drawing contents defined at the indicated address are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is set by the processing of S2505. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to 236a, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2507, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined in step S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (before big hit A and big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing the value of the stop type counter updated every time (see FIG. 63 (b)). (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2603). Thereafter, the process returns to S2401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). When it is determined that the display notice display command for display is received (S2408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (S2409). Details of the notice effect display processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation display. Or setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of notice of a big hit or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66A, the notice effect display processing (S2409) will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart showing the notice effect display processing (S2409).

  In the notice effect display process (FIG. 66 (a), S2409), first, a display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the advance notice to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received display advance notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S2702).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2703), and time data representing the variation time is counted based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d. The counter 233h is set (S2704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705).

  In this way, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and even if it is the same variation pattern, it can be shown to the player as if it is a different display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the selection of the notice display is executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table for notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be overwritten by setting the notice display. Good.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2408 that there is no display preview display command, it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S2410: Yes), a mode switching process is executed (S2411). The mode switching process (S2410) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 66B, but based on the operation of the frame button 22, a process for switching to the display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66B, the mode switching process will be described (S2411). FIG. 66B is a flowchart showing the mode switching process (S2411). In the mode switching process (S2411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 233k (S2801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (S2802). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S2802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (S2803). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S2802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (S2804).

  Thus, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode of the changing pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display state in the standby state is set to be displayed as the set background.

  The process for changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

  The back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the back-on state is set to on. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF, the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set back image change flag is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the set back image discrimination flag, The back image type to be displayed is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified as time passes, and the RAM type (resident video is stored with the image data corresponding to the back image range. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier may be turned on. A back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Also, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2410 that there is no display switching command (S2410: No), it is determined whether there is a display addition command (S2412). If it is determined that there is a display addition command (S2412: Yes), addition command processing is executed (S2413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 67, the addition command processing (S2413) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this addition command processing (S2413).

  In the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413), first, a display data table of display effects corresponding to the received command is determined, and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer and set (S2901). ). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to active). The The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

  The changing symbol information is added and set in the display data table set (S2902). As described above, by setting the changing symbol information, it is possible to suppress a problem that a symbol different from the displayed symbol is displayed when switching to the display content corresponding to the addition time.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and added to the transfer data table buffer 233e and set (S2903). Based on the data table, time data is added to the time counter 233h and set (S2904).

  When an addition command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the addition command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. Set the display data table. By configuring in this way, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode corresponding to the set background mode may be set for the display mode after the addition time. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, a new display data table may be set.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined that there is no display addition command in the process of S2412 (S2412: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2417). If (S2417: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2418), and the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the error command process (S2418) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3001). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3002). The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3001, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3002 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. 64. If it is determined in the processing of S2417 that there is no error command (S2417: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), the simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 65 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 65 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 65A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 70, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 69, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3101). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3101: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3102 to S3104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3101: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3102), S3103 to S3104 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3103). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3103: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3104).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3201).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3201, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3202), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S3103, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3103: No), the process proceeds to S3105.

  In S3105, pointer update processing is executed (S3105). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3301). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3302). As a result, if it is End information (S3302: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3303). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3303: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3304), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3305), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3303: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3306, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3302: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3106). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3106 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3108). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3108: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3109).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3109: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been performed and the confirmation display effect has been performed. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3111). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3112), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3113). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3114), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3115), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3115 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3115, and the By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is OFF instead of ON in the processing of S3109 (S3109: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3116). If the demo display flag is off (S3116: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S3117), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3118). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3119). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3120), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3121), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  In the process of S3116, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3116: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71 and FIG. 72, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 71A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3401: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3401, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3403), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3402), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). FIG. 71B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3402).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3501), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3502). In the processing of S3502, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined in S3502 that the transfer process has not ended (S3502: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to S3503. Also, as a result of the processing of S3501, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3503.

  In the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3503). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3504), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3503 (S3503: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3505), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 63 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 63 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 63 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 64 to 68) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 69 to 70 (b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed at 81. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 72) (see S3401: No in FIG. 71A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3403), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3403).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3105) of the display setting process (S2303) executed previously is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3602). If it is transfer data information (S3602: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3604), and the process proceeds to S3605.

  In the process of S3602, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3602: No), the process of S3603 and S3604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3605. In the process of S3605, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3605), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3605: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3606).

  In the process of S3606, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S3606 (S3606: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3606: Yes), the process proceeds to S3607. Also, as a result of the process of S3605, when the transfer instruction of image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3605: No), the process proceeds to S3607.

  In the process of S3607, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3607). If the transfer start flag is on (S3607: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S3608), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S3603 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3609. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3607: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S3609, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3609). The determination in the process of S3609 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3609 (S3609: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3609 (S3609: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3610). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3610, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3611), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information required for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 31 is generated (S3701). That is, in the process of S3701, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3702). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V-interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 63B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and is read from the character ROM 234 while drawing the image. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70A) when the above-mentioned is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the information on the various counters (special hit random number counter C1 and special hit type counter C2) acquired when the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 at the start winning prize is used as the number of held balls command. The case of inclusion is not necessarily limited to this, but information on various counters (special hit random number counter C1 and special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of winning a start by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113. You may be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first start port 64a is provided in the game board 13 where a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winning to the first start port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on a winning at the first starting port 64a is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or the number of four divided areas by the number of held balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a game ball is won at the second start port 64b and the variation of the special symbol 2 is started when the normal symbol is won for a long time, the special symbol 1 is started. As in the case of the change, the case where the selected change pattern is displayed in a change manner when the start timing of the change has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol 2 based on winning for the long time and winning in the second starting port 64b is started, the third symbol display The opening display mode is displayed on the device 81, and the player has a special effect of special symbol 2 (the effect of variable display of special symbol 2 based on winning in the second start port 64b for a long time of the normal symbol). The first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the start is notified.

<About the display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 74 to 75, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and a timing chart thereof will be described.

  FIG. 74A shows a third symbol display device 81 in the case where a game ball wins the second starting port 64b opened for a long time while the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. It is the figure shown about the opening display mode displayed on. First, the timing chart will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 (a) shows that the special symbol 1 is changing when the normal symbol is won for a long time, the special symbol 2 has 0 reserved balls, and the game ball is won at the second starting port 64b. It is the figure which showed the timing chart until the special symbol 2 when the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or more becomes a fluctuation start.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the special symbol 1 is variably displayed, the normal symbol starts to be hit for a long time, and when the special symbol is 0 holding balls, the game ball is placed in the second start port 64b. Is won, the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for three seconds before the variation stops on the special symbol 1 that is fluctuating. If the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or less, the same processing as that in which the special symbol 1 described later wins while the fluctuation is stopped is executed. A detailed description of this case will be described with reference to FIG.

  While the opening display mode is displayed for 3 seconds, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the main symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed in a normal size, and the main symbol of the special symbol 2 starts to be displayed in a variable manner.

  By configuring in this way, even if a game ball wins the second starting port 64b, even if the variation display of the special symbol 2 does not start until the variation of the special symbol 1 stops, the variation of the special symbol 2 The start time can be easily recognized.

  In addition, by executing the opening effect using the variation time of the special symbol 1, the variation display time of the special symbol 1 can be effectively used.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75 (b), when the normal symbol is won for a long time and a game ball is won at the second starting port 64b, the third symbol in the state where the special symbol 1 has not changed. A timing chart of the display mode displayed on the symbol display device 81 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in a state where the variation of the special symbol 1 is stopped (the state where there is no special symbol 1 holding ball, the stop timing of the special symbol 1), a game ball is placed at the second start port 64b. When the winning display is started and the variation display of the special symbol 2 starts, the opening display mode as shown in FIG. 74 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device for 3 seconds after the variation of the special symbol 2 starts. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 74B, the special symbol 2 is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As an opening display mode, a “chance zone start” for informing the player that the change display of the special symbol 2 based on the winning of the game ball at the second start port 64b is started per long time of the normal symbol. Characters are displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the display data table for the opening effect that is executed when a game ball is won at the second start port 64b per long time of the normal symbol in the second embodiment will be described. In this display data table, the display mode of the opening effect as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (b) is set. The opening effect is stored as moving image data, and the reproduction setting is set in this display data table. Then, it is set as an image in front of the background image. The changing special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) with respect to the control process executed by the sound lamp control process 113 described in the first embodiment. Is different. About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 77, the winning command reception process 2 (S1409) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1409). The winning command receiving process 2 (FIG. 77, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is from S1484 to S1489 in contrast to the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Each process has been added. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  When the process of S1483 is executed, the process of S1484 is executed. In the processing of S1484, it is determined whether or not the winning command received when the sub long time flag 223h is on is the first winning command for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484). If it is determined that it is not the first winning command for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the first winning ball of the special symbol 2 (S1484: Yes), the processing of S1485 is executed. In the process of S1485, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 is in a variable display (S1485).

  When it is determined that the special symbol 1 is stopped (S1485: No), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 is in the variable display (S1485: Yes), it is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol 1 in the change is a win (S1486). If it is determined that the result of determining whether or not the special symbol 1 is fluctuating is out (S1486: No), the processing of S1487 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning / failing determination result of the changing special symbol 1 is a win (S1486: Yes), this process is terminated. As described above, when the special symbol 1 being changed is a win, the jackpot game is subsequently executed, so that the opening display mode is canceled. Therefore, before the jackpot game, the display of the opening display mode indicating that the variation display of the special symbol 2 by the winning of the second starting port 64b based on the long time of the normal symbol is started is cancelled. Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem that may confuse the player.

  In the process of S1487, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds (S1487: Yes), the process of S1489 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds or more (S1487: Yes), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 3 seconds before the remaining, as shown in FIG. A display opening effect command for instructing to display the opening display mode is set (S1488).

  In the process of S1489, based on the change start timing of the special symbol 2, a display opening effect command for instructing to display the opening display mode shown in FIG. 74 (b) is set. As described above, when the game ball wins the second starting port 64b due to the long time of the normal symbol and the special symbol 2 starts to fluctuate, the special symbol 1 is fluctuating and the remaining time is 3 seconds or more. For example, the opening display mode is displayed at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 is stopped or when the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is less than 3 seconds, the opening display mode is the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol 2. Is set to be displayed.

  Therefore, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing for displaying the opening display mode according to the state when the game ball is won at the second start port 64b. Therefore, it is possible to provide a smooth performance that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the present embodiment, the opening display mode is canceled when the determination result of the special symbol 1 being changed is a win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 2 started after the jackpot game is not limited. You may set so that an opening display aspect may be displayed at the timing of a fluctuation | variation start.

<Control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the second embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 79, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment is executed. In the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) is a command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S2320), compared to the control process in the first embodiment. ) Is different. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 78, the command determination process 2 (S2320) performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2320). In command determination processing 2 (FIG. 78, S2320) in the second embodiment, processes from S2414 to S2415 are added to the command determination processing (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S2412, when it is determined that the display addition command has not been received (S2412: No), it is determined whether the display general opening command has been received (S2414). If it is determined that the display general map opening command is received (S2414: Yes), the general map opening process is executed (S2415). On the other hand, if it is determined that the display opening command has not been received (S2414: No), the processing of S2417 is executed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 79, a general-purpose opening process which is one process in the command determination process 2 (FIGS. 78 and 2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. (S2415) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this usual figure opening process (S2415).

  In the usual opening process (FIG. 79), first, the display timing of the opening display mode set in the command is set (S2911). This display timing is set by overwriting a display data table for a general map opening set by a timing indicated by the flag, which is not shown.

  The symbol offset data is set in the display data table for the general opening (S2912). A display data table for general-purpose opening that is set by overwriting the display data table set in the display data table buffer is set (S2913).

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is won for a long time, the display of the special symbol 2 based on winning at the second start opening 64b is accompanied by a notice effect different from the normal time. The configuration in which the variable display mode is displayed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol after the long time is set by one fluctuation with a fluctuation time longer than the normal time. Even when the determination is made continuously, it is different in that it is configured to eliminate the problem that a game ball equal to or larger than the holding ball is won at the second start port 64b and becomes an overflow ball. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, its detailed configuration is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
As for the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, as compared with the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a configuration as shown in FIGS. A normal variation pattern selection table 202 d is added, and a normal status storage area 203 k is added to the RAM 203. About another structure, it is the same structure as 1st Embodiment.

  The normal variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is a selection table for selecting (determining) the variation time of the normal symbol. As shown in FIGS. 80C to 80D, this normal variation pattern selection table 202d is dedicated to the normal status value (mode 1 or mode 2) set in the normal status storage area 203k described later. The normal variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80C) and the normal variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80D) are respectively set.

  A normal status storage area 203k provided in the RAM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is a storage area for storing a normal status. As the normal status, mode 1 and mode 2 are set, and mode 1 is set at the normal time. Mode 2 is set based on the fact that the regular symbol is won for a long time. After the mode 2 is set, the mode 1 is set when the normal symbol variation is selected once. That is, the normal status is a status for making it possible to identify the fluctuation after winning for a long time.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. It differs from the control processing in the first embodiment in that the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) is changed to the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640). About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 81, the normal symbol variation start process 2 (S640) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation start process 2 (S640). In the normal symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 81, S640) in the third embodiment, the processes of S641 to S645 are added to the normal symbol variation start process (FIG. 38, S608) in the first embodiment. Yes. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processes of S630, S634, and S635 are executed, the process of S641 is executed. In the process of S641, the normal symbol change time is selected based on the normal status stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S641). It is determined whether or not the normal status is mode 2 (S642). If it is determined that the normal status is mode 2 (S642: Yes), the normal status is set to mode 1 and stored in the normal status storage area 203k (S643).

  As described above, after selecting the normal symbol variation time, it is determined whether the normal status is set to mode 2, and if the normal status indicates mode 2 after a long time, the mode is Set to 1. Therefore, the first variation of the normal symbol per long time of the normal symbol is selected from the normal variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)). In this normal variation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)), the variation time is set longer than that in the normal variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 80 (c)). It is possible to set a long variation time for one variation later.

  The fluctuation time set in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table B (see FIG. 80 (d)) is set to 70 seconds when the determination result is a hit (long time, normal hit). Yes. As a result, if 4 holds are stored in the special symbol 2 and are immediately displayed in a variable manner, if the result of the determination is all out of place and the longest variation time is selected, a total variation time of 66 seconds is selected. However, since a longer variation time is selected, even if the hit per hour continues, the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is not digested, and the game ball wins the second starting port 64b. However, the malfunction which becomes an overflow ball which does not become a reservation ball can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, 70 seconds is set as the case where special symbol 2 is immediately displayed in a variable manner. However, in consideration of the fact that special symbol 1 is fluctuating, the success / failure determination result of special symbol 1 is missed. It may be configured to set to 100 seconds or more obtained by adding 30 seconds which is the longest variation time selected in the case of. By comprising in this way, when a game ball wins more to the 2nd starting port 64b, it can control becoming an overflow ball. Furthermore, since the next long hit is likely to be established after all the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 have been digested, the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be executed to improve the probability of jackpot.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the configuration in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 won at the first starting port 64a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the color of the reserved symbol displayed when the winning ball is stored in the first starting port 64a and stored as the holding ball is made variable depending on the result of the determination. This is different from the first embodiment. Note that a detailed description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

<Regarding period setting (setting of effect mode) in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) to 82 (b), setting of each period when the game is displayed with a rainbow indicating a jackpot in the reserved symbol in the normal game period in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 82 (a), the reserved symbol is displayed in rainbow during the normal period, the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts to fluctuate in the normal period, fluctuates and stops in the preparation period, and then the jackpot game is started. 6 is a timing chart showing processing in the case.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the game ball wins the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in the normal period and becomes a holding ball, and the result of the pre-reading is regarded as a big hit. The reserved symbol is displayed in rainbow color. In this case, if the special symbol has been changed first, or if it has been held first and the one with the high priority of the change start timing is changed to a stop, it is held as a hold period. Thereafter, the timing for starting the change is reached, and when the change starts, the change starts in the normal game period as shown in FIG. Then, at the start of the change, it is determined whether the preparation period is set when the change is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped within the preparation period, the setting of the preparation period is set to be canceled at this time. As a result, if the player is informed that the jackpot game will start at the start of the change, the player will not be able to start the jackpot by setting the preparation period and changing the background. It is possible to suppress problems that you might think. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the precious hit effect from being lost by changing the background screen to the background of the preparation period during the special symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  Next, FIG. 82B is a timing chart in the case where the fluctuation starts during the preparation period, the fluctuation is displayed over the time production period, and the fluctuation stops during the time production period. The preparation period is not set to a period in which the notice display is not selected, so at the beginning of the change, the notice display that is displayed in the preparation period is not set. The notice effect is set to be displayed. Thereby, it can be made to think that it is easy to generate | occur | produce a big hit if it becomes a time effect with respect to another player. Moreover, although the player is recognized as a big hit at the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to suppress a problem that the user is dissatisfied with the fact that the notice display (special fish school) dedicated to the time effect that notifies the big hit is not displayed. .

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 83, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 as compared with the first embodiment. A notice delay flag 223β is added. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The mode B prohibition flag 223α is a flag indicating that the setting of the preparation period is prohibited. When the reserved symbol is displayed in the rainbow display color indicating that the success / failure determination of the special symbol 1 indicated by the reserved symbol is a jackpot, the change display of the special symbol 1 corresponding to the reserved symbol is stopped and displayed in the preparation period. If determined, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (FIG. 86, S1553). Although illustration is omitted, the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to OFF based on the start of the big hit game.

  The advance notice flag 223β is a flag indicating that the notice display mode of the special fish school that informs the player that the game is a big hit in the time effect period is delayed until the start of the open effect of the big hit game. This advance delay flag 223β is set to ON in the process of S1734 in the effect change process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Here, when the time effect period is set, when the determination result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a big hit, it is set to ON when the remaining fluctuating time is 3 seconds or less.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice display in a state where the remaining change display is already small. Furthermore, the notice display mode of the special fish school is delayed until the start of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game has started, and in the time production period, if the jackpot game The fact that the notice display mode of the school of fish is displayed can be easily informed.

  The advance notice delay flag 223β is set to OFF in the process of S1546 of the opening process (FIG. 88, S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

<Regarding Control Processing by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 84, the command determination process 2 (S1320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1320). The command determination process 2 (FIG. 84, S1320) in the fourth embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the fluctuation pattern reception process (FIG. 48, S1402) is a fluctuation pattern reception. In the process 2 (S1529), the winning command receiving process (FIG. 53, S1409) is changed to the winning command receiving process 3 (FIG. 84, S1530), and the processes of S1539 to S1540 are added.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (S1529), the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) is different from the fluctuation pattern command reception process (FIG. 48, S1402) in the first embodiment. Since it is only changed to S1428), the illustration is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 (S1428) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1428). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1434 to S1435 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 49, S1422) in the first embodiment, and the notice selection process is performed. (FIG. 86, S1550) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the advance notice selection process (S1550), which is one process in the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 85, S1428), will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the notice selection processing (S1550).

  In the notice selection process (FIG. 86, S1550), first, it is determined whether the color of the reserved symbol of the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is rainbow (S1551). If it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is rainbow (S1551: Yes), it is determined whether the period during which the special symbol that starts changing is stopped is a preparation period (S1552). When it is determined that the period during which the fluctuation is stopped is the preparation period (S1552: Yes), the mode B prohibition flag 223α is set to ON (S1553). Thereafter, the process of S1554 is executed.

  In this way, if the color of the reserved symbol is a big hit (the result of lottery of the reserved ball indicated by the reserved symbol), the variation stop time is determined. Mode B prohibition flag 223α indicating that prohibition is set is set to ON. Therefore, before it becomes a big hit, it is changed to a background image indicating the preparation period, and it is possible to suppress a problem that it is not possible to concentrate on the variation display of the special symbol. Moreover, in the other pachinko machine 10, since it is set in the preparation period, in the pachinko machine 10 where the player is playing, it can be recognized that the determination result is a big hit by not being set in the preparation period, You can play with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1551, when it is determined that the color of the reserved symbol is not rainbow (S1551: No), in the process of S1552, when it is determined that the period at which the change is stopped is not the preparation period (S1552: No), The process of S1554 is executed.

  In the process of S1554, a notice effect display is selected from the notice selection table A, and the selected notice effect display is set (S1554). Thereafter, a notice effect is selected and set from the touch charge notice selection table (S1555).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the winning command reception process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 3 (S1530). In the prize command reception process 3 (FIG. 87, S1530) in the fourth embodiment, processes from S1534 to S1538 are added to the prize command reception process (FIG. 53, S1409) in the first embodiment. . In addition, since each process from S1531 to S1533 in the fourth embodiment is the same as each process from S1481 to S1483 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the process of S1553 is executed, the process of S1534 is executed. In the processing of S1534, it is determined whether or not a special symbol 1 winning command has been received (S1534). If a special command 1 winning command has been received (S1534: Yes), it is determined whether or not the received winning command is a winning command indicating that the determination result is a big hit (S1535). When it is determined that the determination result is a big hit (S1535: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223k is acquired (S1536).

  It is determined whether the value of the obtained effect counter 223k is “0 to 30” (S1537). If it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223k is any one of “0-30” (S1537: Yes), the color of the corresponding reserved symbol is set to rainbow (S1538).

  Here, as for the color of the reserved symbol, in the reserved number display update process (FIG. 46, S1306), a display holding command indicating the color and number of the reserved symbol is generated and output to the display control device 114. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the opening process (S1540) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S1540).

  In the opening process (FIG. 88, S1540), first, it is determined whether or not it is 1 minute or less until the time effect start period (S1541). If it is determined that it is 1 minute or less until the start period of the time effect (S1541: Yes), the volume in the jackpot game is set to a low volume (S1542).

  In this way, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is received, the volume of the jackpot game is set to be small if it is 1 minute or less before the time effect period is set. However, it can be difficult to understand from other players. As will be described later, when the time effect period is set thereafter, the volume of the jackpot game is set to the normal volume. Therefore, other players can make it seem as if the jackpot game has started due to the time production period, and make the player think that the jackpot game is likely to start during the time production period. Can do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1541, when it is determined that there is a time longer than 1 minute until the time effect period (S1541: No), the process of S1543 is executed. In the process of S1543, it is determined whether the notice delay flag 223β is on (S1543). When it is determined that the advance delay flag 223β is on (S1543: Yes), a display advance notice display command for setting the advance notice display of the special fish school is set (S1544). A display opening command is set (S1545). The advance delay flag 223β is set to OFF (S1546). On the other hand, in the process of S1543, when it is determined that the advance notice delay flag 223β is off (S1543: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process 2 (S1330). In the synchronous effect management process 2 (FIG. 89, S1330) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1730 and S1731 are added to the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 56, S1314) in the first embodiment. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  After executing the process of S1707, the effect changing process 2 (S1730) is executed. Details of the effect changing process 2 (S1730) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect changing process 2 (S1730).

  In the effect changing process 2 (FIG. 90, S1730), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S1731). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S1731: Yes), it is determined whether the determination result of the changing special symbol is a jackpot (S1732). If it is determined that the determination result is a big hit (S1732: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733).

  When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 3 seconds or less (S1733: Yes), the notice delay flag 223β is set to ON (S1734). Thereafter, this process is terminated. on the other hand. In the process of S1733, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 3 seconds (S1733: No), a display notice display command for displaying the special fish school display is set (S1735).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1731 that the special symbol is stopped (S1731: No), or if it is determined in S1732 that the determination result is not correct (S1732: No), S1736. Execute the process. In the processing of S1736, it is determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S1736). If it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S1736: Yes), the volume setting for the jackpot game is set to the normal volume (S1737). Thereafter, the process of S1735 is executed.

  As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played when the time effect period is set, the volume setting is set to the normal volume, so the start of the jackpot game is one minute of the setting of the time effect period. If it is within the previous volume, the volume is set to a low volume, so the volume will be returned to the normal volume, and other players started the big hit game based on the setting of the time performance period Can make you think. Therefore, when the time effect period is set, other players can be made to think that the jackpot game is easily started, and the expectation for the jackpot for the time effect period can be increased. Therefore, the player can play a game in the hope that a time production period will be set, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1736 that the game is not a big hit game (S1736: No), this process ends.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, based on the fixed time, the display mode of each mode displayed in the fixed time of each background mode is set, and then the SW valid time has passed, The case where the display mode indicated by the addition command corresponding to the set background mode has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the display mode of each background mode displayed in a fixed time is set based on the number of reserved items, and then set in an additional time until the fixed time elapses. This is different from the first embodiment in that the table mode corresponding to each background mode is set. Note that illustration and description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment is omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the contents of the special figure 1 variation pattern selection table of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are changed. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 92, in the fifth embodiment, the addition command is not set when the addition time is 0 second as compared to the first embodiment. Further, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the variation time, SW valid time, fixed time, and addition time of the super reach jackpot variation patterns B1 and B2 and the super reach loss variation patterns B1 and B2 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. In addition, an addition data transfer flag 233m is added to the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  This addition data transfer flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the transfer of display data corresponding to the addition time has started. The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to ON in the processing of S2432 of the addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment. Further, it is set to OFF in the process of S2441.

<Regarding Control Processing by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96.

  With reference to FIG. 94, the command determination process 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S1340). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 94, S1340) in the fifth embodiment, the process of S1560 is added to the command determination process (FIG. 47, S1311) in the first embodiment. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  After the process of S1414 is executed, the process of S1560 is executed. In the process of S1560, a display addition command for notifying the display controller 114 of information indicated by the received addition command is set (S1560).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the variable display setting process 2 (S1350) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1350). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 95, S1350) in the fifth embodiment, the processes from S1510 to S1513 are deleted from the variable display setting process (FIG. 54, S1312) in the first embodiment. . For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1360). The frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (FIG. 96, S1360) in the fifth embodiment is different from the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1920 is S1940. The processing has been changed.

  After the process of S1919 is executed, the process of S1940 is executed. In the process of S1940, a display background command indicating the set background mode is set (S1940).

<Control Processing by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99, the command determination process 3 (S2320) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S2320). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 97, S2320) in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command process (FIG. 65, S2405) is different from the command determination process (FIG. 64, S2302) in the first embodiment. In the processing (FIG. 98, S2420), the addition command processing (FIG. 67, S2413) is changed to the addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430). For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2420) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command process 2 (S2420). The variation pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 98, S2420) in the fifth embodiment is different from the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 65 (a), S2405) in the first embodiment in that the processing of S2503 and S2504 is S2510, respectively. The processing is changed to each processing of S2511. For the other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the processing of S2510, the display data table corresponding to the fixed time of each background mode is determined based on the number of reservations and set in the display data table buffer (S2510). The variable display data table corresponding to the background mode stored in the background mode storage area is set to active (S2511).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the addition command process 2 (FIG. 99, S2430) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the addition command process 2 (S2430).

  In addition command processing 2 (FIG. 99, S2430), first, it is determined whether or not the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431). If it is determined that the addition data transfer flag 233m is on (S2431: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the fixed time (S2435: Yes), the determined display data table is set in the display data table buffer (S2436). A transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (S2437). The data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S2438). Time data is set in the time counter based on the data table (S2439). The pointer is initialized (S2440). The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to OFF (S2441).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2431 that the addition data transfer flag 233m is off (S2341: No), the display data table is determined based on the received command and the variation pattern, and the symbol information is set. (S2432). The transfer of the moving image data set in the display data table is started (S2433). The addition data transfer flag 233m is set to ON (S2434).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fixed time variable display is performed by adding time until the fixed time elapses after the data of the variable display is set for each background mode based on the number of holds. Since the variable display data to be set is set, the amount of data set at the start of the variable display can be reduced. Therefore, the control load at the start of fluctuation is reduced, and problems such as processing failures can be suppressed.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an RTC 292 that operates with a built-in battery, measures the time, and produces an effect of a variable display selected for each time based on the measured data. The case where it is configured to be different has been described. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured such that the power supplied from the pachinko machine 10 is also input to the RTC 292. When the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the power is supplied to the RTC 292. It was configured as follows. Further, the configuration switch 291 is configured to be rotationally driven by a motor, and is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration can be switched by control of the pachinko machine 10.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment>
With reference to FIGS. 100 to 101, an electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RTC 292 connected to the audio lamp control device 113. A voltage of 5 V is connected to the RTC 292 from the power supply device 290 via the diode D1. A 5V battery 292a included in the RTC 292 is also connected to the power input unit via a predetermined resistor. With this configuration, when voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115, the battery is supplied to the RTC 292 from the pachinko machine 10 and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Switching is performed so that necessary power is supplied from 292a.

  Therefore, the operation time of the battery 292a can be reduced, and the power consumption of the battery 292a can be further suppressed. Therefore, the RTC 292 can be operated over a long period of time.

  Next, as illustrated in FIG. 100B, the setting switch 291 is configured to be rotatable by a switching motor 293 configured by a stepping motor. With this configuration, when the power of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, the setting switch 291 can be automatically changed to a setting that prohibits the use of the RTC 292. Therefore, it is possible to save the time and effort required for setting at the amusement store, and to reduce maintenance work.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the time setting process 2 (S1230) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230).

  In the time setting process 2 (FIG. 102, S1230), first, it is determined whether the setting switch 291 is 1 or 3 (S1221). If the setting switch 291 is set to 1 or 3, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1222). It is determined whether the acquired time information is within the deadline data (in this embodiment, within 6 years from a predetermined date).

  If it is determined that the acquired time data is within the time limit (S1223: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223m is set to ON (S1224). Based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223n (S1225).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired time information is not within the deadline data, that is, six years or more have passed (S1223: No), the operation of the switching motor 293 is performed so that the setting switch 291 becomes 2. The setting is made (S1226). Here, specifically, the setting switch 291 is set so that the setting is switched one by one every time it is rotated 90 degrees. Therefore, when switching from setting 1 to setting 2, the setting switch 291 is rotated 90 degrees forward. The stepping motor which is the switching motor 293 is operated. In order to switch from setting 3 to setting 2, the stepping motor which is the switching motor 293 is operated so as to rotate forward 270 degrees.

  As a result, setting 2 is set so that the function of the RTC 292 is disabled as shown in FIG. 26B and the number of times of change display is switched to display. Therefore, when 6 years, which is the expiry date of the battery 292a of the RTC 292, has passed, the function of the RTC 292 is automatically set to be invalid so that the time effect period and the like can be set in a state where the timing data is not accurate due to power shortage. It is possible to suppress problems that are executed and cannot synchronize with other pachinko machines 10.

  In the present embodiment, the setting 1 or the setting 3 is configured to automatically set the setting 2 by passing the term data. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When the setting 2 is the setting 3, the switching motor 293 may be operated to switch to the setting 4 respectively. With this configuration, it is possible to configure only the function of the RTC 292 without changing the display setting of the total number of changes.

  In addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the setting switch is changed on the hall side, a retry is made to match the correct setting (matching the setting using the RTC 292 after 6 years have passed). A process for causing the switching motor 293 to execute the operation may be added. In this case, it may be configured to operate immediately after monitoring for every predetermined time (for example, every hour) or when the setting is changed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the expiration date of the RTC 292 has passed on the hall side as well.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine the expiration date data on the date when six years have passed from the preset setting period, but not limited thereto, a determination means for determining the voltage value of the battery 292a is provided, The setting switch 291 may be automatically switched when the voltage value is equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage (for example, 3.3 V or lower). With this configuration, the state of the battery 292a of the RTC 292 can be further determined and switched.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 112. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a configuration in which the player can change the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the touch switch 290 provided on the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 provided in the game board 60 is provided with a board-side touch sensor 294 constituted by an optical touch sensor. The board side touch sensor 294 is provided above the third symbol display device 81, and the board side left touch sensor 294 a provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the board side right provided on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. And a touch sensor 294b.

  This board side touch sensor 294 turns on the board side left touch sensor 294a when the player holds his hand over the left side of the main display area Ds of the 3rd symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, and the 3rd symbol display. When the hand is held over the right side of the main display area Dm of the apparatus, the panel-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. As will be described in detail later, the board-side touch sensor 294 brings the hand close to the display mode of the cards and the like displayed on the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 so as to point with a finger or the like through the glass unit 16. You can choose. In addition, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the user holds his hand over the glass unit 16 and reacts either the panel side left touch sensor 294a or the panel side right touch sensor 294b of the panel side touch sensor 294 to turn on. An effect of moving a school of fish from right to left is performed.

<About the display effect using the touch sensor in the seventh embodiment>
A display effect using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 105.

  With reference to FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c), a fish school charge notice using the frame-side touch sensor 290 and the board-side touch sensor 294 will be described. Normally, when the main symbol is in the reach display mode, the fish school notice display mode in which a school of fish (a school of fish) swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is shown in FIG. As shown in the selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A), this is a notice display mode that can be easily selected when the result of the determination is a big hit. Here, this school of fish charge notice is also configured to be more easily selected when the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit than when it is out of place. Although illustration is omitted, the fish school charge notice effect may be set to be selected by replacing the fish school notice with the school fish charge notice in the notice selection table A222e (see FIG. 25A).

  When a fish school charge notice is selected as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the main symbol of the changing special symbol 1 is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the text “Collect fish with the frame touch sensor! Reach with 5 or more!” Is displayed, and the player touches the frame touch sensor 290 to turn it on to collect the fish. Then, when the number becomes 5 or more, a character for informing that the reach is reached is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the player holds his / her hand over the touch sensor 290 of the frame, a display mode in which fishes gather at the right end of the third symbol display device 81 based on the held time is displayed. . When the number of fish is 5 or more, the main symbol is displayed in a reach display mode. In this state, when a hand is placed on the board side touch sensor 294 (either the board side left touch sensor 294a or the board side right touch sensor 294b) to turn it on, a group of fish gathered as shown in FIG. The display is variably displayed so as to swim from the right to the left of the 3 symbol display device 81.

  In this embodiment, when the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on, the school of fish that has gathered is displayed to change from right to left. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. It is good also as a structure which acquires the value of the production counter 223k based on this, performs a decision | availability determination, and variably displays the school of fish from the right of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, when winning. In this case, if the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol that is changing is a win, it is configured so that it is easier to determine that it is a hit than a miss, so that the school of fish can be displayed in a variable manner, so that the expectation for the jackpot The player can be notified.

  Also, the player can move the school of fish from the right to the left with his / her hand on the third symbol display device 81 so that the board-side touch sensor 294 is turned on. Based on the movement of the hand, you can make it appear as if the school of fish fluctuated. In addition, by executing a lottery to determine whether the school of fish is variably displayed each time the board-side touch sensor 290 is turned on, the player moves his hand many times to turn on the board-side touch sensor 294, so that multiple After being turned on once, the lottery is won and the school of fish fluctuates and displays, so that the player can be surprised.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a display mode of a card notice, which is a notice effect using the touch sensor 290 on the frame side and the touch sensor on the board side, will be described. In FIG. 105 (a), the card advance notice is selected and the changing special symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81. Two cards are displayed on the left and right, and a triangular cursor is displayed below one of the cards. In addition, a message “Move the cursor with your finger and select a card!” Is displayed, and a notification is issued to urge the player to move the cursor with his finger. Here, the card A displayed in FIG. 105 (a) is arranged below the board-side left touch sensor 294a, and the card B is arranged below the board-side right touch sensor 294b.

  Thus, when the card A is pointed through the glass unit 16, the board-side left touch sensor 294a is turned on and the cursor moves below the card A. on the other hand. When the card B is pointed through the glass unit 16, display control is performed so that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on and the cursor moves below the card B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters “determined by the frame side touch sensor”, and by turning on the frame side touch sensor 290 for the selected card. The card is determined, and as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the selected card is turned over, and a message written on the card is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 105 (b), the character “Leach!” Is displayed to notify that the changing special symbol is in the reach display mode.

  This notification content is set in multiple numbers. For example, it is set to be easy to select when it is a “hit” or “hit” to notify that the determination result of the special symbol being fluctuated is a big hit. A character such as “Intense heat !!” is displayed to inform the player that the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high. This character is selected in advance when the card notice is selected, and the same notice display mode is displayed regardless of whether the card A or card B is selected. If the card selection is not performed by the player in the card notice, the card notice is not displayed and the card notice display is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the card content is not displayed when the card notice is not selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the card on which the cursor is positioned is automatically displayed to the player after a predetermined time has elapsed. You may comprise so that it may be displayed.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a panel-side touch sensor 294 that is electrically connected to an input / output port of the sound lamp control device 113 is added, and a frame-side time counter is stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. 223γ and a board side time counter 223δ are respectively added. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the board-side touch sensor 294 is provided with transmissive sensors on the left and right of the center frame 86 of the variable display unit 80 toward the glass unit 16. The panel-side touch sensor 294 includes a panel-side left touch sensor 294a disposed on the upper left side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and a board-side right sensor disposed on the upper right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. And a touch sensor 294b. When the panel side touch sensor 294 is placed over the left side portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the glass unit 16, the panel side left touch sensor 294a is turned on and the hand is held over the right side part of the display area. The panel-side right touch sensor 294b is turned on. Further, the board-side left touch sensor 294a and the board-side right touch sensor 294b are each turned on when a hand is held over the central portion of the display area.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, the frame side time counter 223γ of the RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is a counter for measuring the time when the frame side touch sensor 290 is turned on. is there. This frame side time counter 223γ is incremented by one by the process of S1967 of the sensor execution process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The board side time counter 223δ is a counter for measuring the time when the board side touch sensor 294 is turned on. This board-side time counter 223δ is incremented by 1 by the process of S1974 of the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment.

<Regarding Control Processing by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in the Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  With reference to FIG. 108, the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1370). The frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) in the seventh embodiment is a sensor input process (FIG. 60) compared to the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. , S1905) is changed to sensor input processing 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), and special operation processing (FIG. 112, S1960) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Next, referring to FIG. 109, it is a process in the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (FIG. 108, S1370) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment. A certain sensor input process 2 (S1950) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the sensor input process 2 (S1950).

  In the sensor input process 2 (FIG. 109, S1950), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is larger than 0 (S1951). If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is 0 (S1951: No), it is determined whether the notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the panel side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952). ). When it is determined that the notice effect display using the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board side touch sensor 294 is set (S1952: Yes), the frame side touch sensor 290 or the board set to the notice effect is set. The sensor effective time of the side touch sensor 294 is set in the sensor effective time counter 223r (S1953). On the other hand, when it is determined that the notice effect display using the frame-side touch sensor 290 or the board-side touch sensor 294 is not set (S1952: No), this process ends. In the process of S1951, when it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r is greater than 0 (S1951: Yes), the sensor effect process is executed (S1954).

  Next, details of the sensor effect process (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the sensor effect process (S1954).

  In the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954), first, is the effective time of the touch sensor 290 on the frame side, that is, is the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side zero? It is determined (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the frame-side touch sensor 290 is 0 (S1961: No), the process of S1969 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223r corresponding to the frame-side touch sensor 290 is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), the sensor effective time counter corresponding to the frame-side touch sensor 290 is determined. 223r is subtracted and updated (S1962). Here, in the present embodiment, 1 is subtracted from the time corresponding to the elapsed time.

  It is determined whether or not the frame side touch sensor 290 is ON (S1963). If it is determined that the frame-side touch sensor 290 is on (S1963: Yes), it is determined whether the selected (set) notice effect is a card notice effect (S1964). On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is off (S1963: No), the process of S1969 is executed. If it is determined that the card notice effect is present (S1964: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the touch sensor 290 on the frame side is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1966).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1964, when it is determined that the selected notice effect is not the card notice effect (S1964: No), 1 is added to the frame side time counter 223γ (S1967). A display notice display command for display (shown) corresponding to the value of the frame side time counter 223γ is set (S1968). Here, when the display control display device 114 receives this display notice display command for display, a display data table for notice corresponding to the value of the frame side time counter 223γ indicated by the display notice display command for display is set. For example, when the fish charge notice shown in FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (c) is selected, display data for displaying fish up to the upper limit of the number of fish preset in the fish charge notice. A table is set up. For example, when the fish charge notice that the upper limit of the number of fish is set to 3 is selected, every time the value of the frame side time counter 223r is increased by 1 second, the number of fish is incremented by 1 and displayed. When the upper limit value is three, a display data table that maintains the number is set.

  In the process of S1969, it is determined whether the board-side touch sensor 294 is valid or not, that is, whether the sensor valid-time counter 223r corresponding to the board-side touch sensor 294 is greater than 0 (S1969). If it is determined that the board side touch sensor 294 is not valid (S1969: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the valid time of the board side touch sensor 294 is in effect (S1969: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223r corresponding to the board side touch sensor 294 is subtracted and updated (S1970). It is determined whether the panel side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971). If it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is off (S1971: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the board-side touch sensor 294 is on (S1971: Yes), it is determined whether the selected notice effect is a card notice effect (S1972). If it is determined that the card notice effect has been selected (S1972: Yes), a sensor selection process is executed (S1973). The sensor selection process (S1973) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 111, but a process for selecting a card is executed in the card notice effect.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1972 that the card notice effect is not selected (S1972: No), the board side time counter 223δ is incremented by 1 (S1974). A display notice display command for display corresponding to the value of the board side time counter 223δ (indicating the value of the board side time counter 223δ) is set. Here, the value of the board side time counter 223δ is reset to 0, which is the initial value, based on the setting of the display notice display command for display. When the display control display device 114 receives the display notice display command for display, the display control device 114 is set to move and display the fish school from the left to the right of the display area (S1975).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the sensor selection process (S1973) in the sensor effect process (FIG. 110, S1954) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the sensor selection process (S1973).

  In the sensor selection process (FIG. 111, S1973), first, it is determined whether the board-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981). If it is determined that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is on (S1981: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the right side is set (S1982). On the other hand, in the process of S1981, when it is determined that the board-side right touch sensor 294b is off (S1981: No), it is determined whether the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983). If it is determined that the board-side left touch sensor 294a is on (S1983: Yes), a display command for displaying the cursor on the left side is set (S1984). On the other hand, in the process of S1983, when it is determined that the board-side left touch sensor 294a is off (S1983: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the special operation process (S1960) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this special operation processing (S1960). The special operation process (FIG. 112, S1960) in the seventh embodiment is the same as the processes in S1907 to S1913, S1916 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 59, S1307) in the first embodiment. Since it is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to cause the player to perform an operation and to suppress boredom by executing an effect using a plurality of touch sensors. In addition, by configuring the touch sensor, the player can operate the display screen by pointing his / her finger, and the feeling of participating in the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the structure of said each embodiment may be implemented combining all or one part.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information necessary to execute a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can enter the game ball and the game ball entering the entrance; On the basis of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, a determination unit for determining whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied, and a storage unit for storing the lottery information until at least the lottery condition is satisfied. A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored in the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance, and a game ball than the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, and when the first condition is satisfied, the entry assisting means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, the first opening And variable control means for changing at least the second opening which is variable from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player, and the variable control means. 2 When the game ball enters the entrance and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while being changed to open, the number of the lottery information is given to the player. Display control means capable of causing the display means to display the identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entrance opening while being changed to open. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the lottery information acquisition means obtains the lottery information necessary to execute the game lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The entry assisting means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. A first opening that is variable from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied, and a ball that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening when the second condition is satisfied. The assisting means is changed by the variable control means from the second state to the first state. When the game ball enters the entrance and the lottery information is stored in the storage means while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, the number of lottery information is given to the player. While being changed to the first opening, an identification symbol different from the identification symbol due to the game ball entering the entrance is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Accordingly, it is possible to easily notify the player of the number of game balls that have entered the entrance at the second opening and the lottery information is stored. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the second opening has been performed, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine A1, to detect at least the first condition and the second condition based on detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball and the detection means determining the passage of the game ball. Discriminating information acquiring means for acquiring the discriminating information, discriminating means for discriminating whether the discriminating information acquired by the acquiring means is based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, or whether the first opening is established, Determination information storage means for storing the determination information acquired at least until the determination condition is satisfied, and determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means in advance before the determination condition is satisfied If the advance determination means determines that the second release is established, the information is sent to the player to change the entry assisting means to the second release. Gaming machine A2, wherein also those having a notification means for notifying before.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means. Based on the determination of the passage of the game ball by the detection means, the determination information for determining whether or not at least the first condition and the second condition are satisfied is acquired by the determination information acquisition means. Based on the determination information acquired by the acquisition means, the determination means determines whether the first opening or the second opening is satisfied. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the discrimination information storage unit until at least a discrimination condition is satisfied. Prior to the determination condition being established, the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is determined in advance by the prior determination means. When it is determined by the prior determination means that the second opening has been established, the information is notified to the player by the notification means before the entry assisting means is changed to the second opening. Thereby, it can know in advance about the 2nd opening and can prepare for the 2nd opening. Therefore, there is an effect that the second opening can be used effectively.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the informing means is based on the fact that the prior opening means has determined that the second opening has been established, until the entry assisting means is in the first state. The first notification mode indicating the first state is notified, and the second notification mode indicating the change to the second state is notified based on the change to the second state. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the second opening has been determined by the prior determination means, the first notification mode indicating the first state is notified by the notification means until the period when the entrance assisting means is in the first state. The Further, based on the change to the second state, the notification means notifies the second notification mode indicating that the state has been changed to the second state. Thus, the player can recognize the state of the entrance assisting means by notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player misses that the entrance / exit assisting means is in the second open state.

  In the gaming machine A3, as the first notification mode, the notification unit displays, on the display unit, a first notification symbol indicating that the entry assisting unit is in the first state, and as the second notification mode, The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the display means displays a second notification symbol indicating that the entry assisting means is in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a first notification mode, a first notification symbol indicating that the entrance assisting unit is in the first state is displayed on the display unit by the notification unit. Further, as the second notification mode, a second notification pattern indicating that the entering assistance means is in the second state is displayed on the display means by the notification means. Thereby, the player can recognize by the display means whether the entering assistance means is in the first state or the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be obtained from the display means and the game can be easily performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, based on the fact that the pre-discriminating means determines the establishment of the second release, before the information is notified by the notifying means, the notifying means A gaming machine A5 having a prior notification means for notifying a prior notification mode for notifying that notification is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, based on the fact that the establishment of the second opening is determined by the prior determination means, the information is notified by the notification means Since the prior notification mode for notifying that the notification is performed by the notification means is previously notified by the prior notification means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player misses the fact that the second opening has been made. .

<Feature B group>
On the basis of the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to win, a display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol Time counting in a gaming machine having dynamic display mode determination means to be determined and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the winning / failure determination result being winning. The time display means capable of determining the time measurement data by the time measurement means, and the dynamic display mode determination means when the time measurement data determination means determines that the set value is predetermined. The determined dynamic display mode is different from other periods, the specific period in which the dynamic display mode is determined, and the preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period, respectively. The dynamic display mode of the dynamic display mode that can be determined outside the specific period by the dynamic display mode determination unit is set to be shorter than the preparation period. A gaming machine B1 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. The display unit displays an identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discriminating means. When it is determined that the preset value is determined by the time data determination unit, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is determined to be different from other periods. A specific period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period are respectively set by the production period setting means. The dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode that can be determined outside the specific period by the dynamic display mode determination means is set to be shorter than the preparation period. Thereby, the dynamic display mode started from before the preparation period can be ended in the preparation period before the specific period starts. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific period can be started by preparing for the specific period.

  In the gaming machine B1, the timing means counts the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and the timing data discriminating means is the time data by the timing means being turned on to the gaming machine. When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since then, it is determined that the set value is the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time measuring means measures the elapsed time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine by the time measuring means. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed since the time-measurement data by the time-measurement means was turned on to the gaming machine, it is determined by the time-data determination process that it is a set value. Thereby, by turning on power to a plurality of gaming machines at the same time, the gaming machines can measure the same elapsed time. Therefore, the specific period can be set in synchronization with a plurality of the same gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that a dynamic display mode synchronized between gaming machines can be determined.

  In the gaming machine B1, the time measuring means is configured to be able to time the time even when the gaming machine is not powered on, and the time data discriminating means is the time counting acquired from the time measuring means. A gaming machine B3, wherein when it is determined that the data is a preset set time, the set value is determined.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, even when the gaming machine is not powered on, the time is measured by the time measuring means. When it is determined that the time data acquired from the time measuring means is a preset time, the time data determining means determines that it is a set value. Thus, by setting the same time as a set value between the same gaming machines in advance, the gaming machines can be set in a specific period in synchronization with each other. Therefore, there is an effect that a dynamic display mode synchronized between gaming machines can be determined.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of whether or not the result is determined by the result determination means, and the notice effect executing means A preliminary announcement effect to be executed based on the determination result, a preliminary announcement determination unit for determining from among the plurality of preliminary announcement effects, and the preparation period based on the preparation period being set by the period setting unit And a prohibiting means for prohibiting the execution of the notice effect during the game machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, the notice effect execution means is executed by the notice effect execution means based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is determined. The notice effect to be executed by the notice effect executing means is determined by the notice effect determining means from the plurality of notice effects based on the determination result. Based on the setting of the preparation period by the period setting means, the prohibition means is set so as to prohibit the notice effect from being executed during the preparation period. Thereby, during the preparation period, the notice effect is not determined, so that it is possible to provide the player with an effect different from the normal time. Therefore, in the preparation period before the transition to the specific period, the player can be provided with an effect different from the normal time, and the player can easily recognize that the specific period is about to start. There is.

  In the gaming machine B4, at least a specific notice effect is set in the plurality of notice effects, and the notice effect determining unit is more likely to determine the specific notice effect in the specific period than outside the specific period. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects can be obtained. That is, at least a specific notice effect is set in the plurality of notice effects. In the specific period, the specific notice effect is more easily determined by the notice effect determining means than outside the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily notify the player that the specific period is due to the specific notice effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a gaming machine B6 is characterized in that a plurality of setting values are set in advance.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B5, since a plurality of set values are set in advance, there is an effect that the specific period can be set a plurality of times.

<Feature C group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a bonus determination means for performing the hit / no-go determination, and a bonus that is more advantageous to the player than the first hit is granted when the hit determination means determines that the hit is true. A hit type determining means for determining at least a second hit, a display means for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the validity determination means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having dynamic display mode determining means for determining and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the success / failure determination is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a win A timing means capable of timing, a timing data discriminating means for discriminating timing data by the timing means, and a preset value determined by the timing data discrimination In this case, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is a specific period in which a dynamic display mode different from other periods is determined, and preparation for starting the specific period before the specific period Period setting means for setting each period, and dynamic display determination means for determining whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display means when the specific period is set by the period setting means And a second hit discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the dynamic determination result is the second hit based on the fact that the dynamic display discrimination means determines that the dynamic display is performed. And when the second hit determining means determines that the second hit, the player is notified of the notification mode indicating the second hit before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. Notification means Gaming machine C1, characterized in that those having.

  According to the gaming machine C1, whether or not the game is determined is determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the start condition. When it is determined that the winning / nothing determination means is a winning, the first winning and the second winning in which a privilege more advantageous to the player than the first winning is determined by the winning type determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure by the determination unit is displayed by the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification symbol displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. When the determination result is displayed with an identification symbol indicating a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discriminating means. A specification in which a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined to be different from other periods when it is determined that the preset value is determined by the timing data determination. The period setting means sets a period and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period. When the specific period is set by the period setting unit, the dynamic display determination unit determines whether the dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the display unit. Based on the fact that the dynamic display determining means determines that the dynamic display is performed, the second hit determining means determines whether the dynamic determination result determination result is the second hit. . When the second hit determining means determines that it is the second hit, the notifying means notifies the player of the second hit state before the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. The Thus, by setting the specific period, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is in the second win earlier than usual. Therefore, the specific period can be made a period more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible for the player to play with the expectation that the specific period is set, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine C1, the notifying means displays a symbol indicating that the second hit is on the display means, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, since the symbol indicating the second hit is displayed on the display means by the notifying means, it is easier for the player to understand that the second hit. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, at least a common hit identification symbol indicating that the identification symbol is the first hit or the second hit and a dedicated hit identification symbol indicating the second hit are set. When the common winning identification symbol is stopped and displayed, a determination notification mode indicating the winning type determined by the winning type determining means is notified during the bonus game executed thereafter. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. In other words, at least the common hit identification symbol indicating the first hit or the second hit and the dedicated hit identification symbol indicating the second hit are set in the identification symbol. When the common winning identification symbol is stopped and displayed, a determination notification mode indicating the winning type determined by the winning type determining means is notified during the bonus game executed thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to play a game while expecting the second hit even during the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

<Feature D group>
Main control means for executing control of the game, slave control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and display means, wherein the main control means Based on the establishment, a dynamic display time for determining a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying on the display means a correct / invalid determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination and an identification symbol indicating the correct / incorrect determination result by the correct / incorrect determination means. Dynamic display time determining means for determining, and dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means; A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on being stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that the winner determination result by the winner determination means is a win, Secondary control means Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and display control means for displaying the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit In the gaming machine having the above, the slave control means includes: an operation means operable by the player; an operation determination means for determining whether the operation means has been operated; and the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination means. And switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on the determination that the operating unit has been operated. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is prohibited from switching to another dynamic display mode and the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit. Switching prohibited The dynamic display information signal includes a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means in a first time and a second time added to the first time. The dynamic display mode determination means includes a first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and a second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time. And the switchable period is set within a period during which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine D1, game control is executed by the main control means. Based on the control signal from the main control means, control of the game is executed by the sub control means. In the main control means, the determination as to whether the start condition is satisfied is executed by the determination means. The dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display time determination unit. A dynamic display information generating unit generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control unit of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining unit. On the basis of the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that it is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. In the sub control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is displayed by the display control unit. It is determined by the operation determining means whether the operating means operable by the player has been operated. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination unit, the switching unit switches the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on determining that the operation unit has been operated. . The dynamic display mode determining unit determines the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit and the switching prohibition period during which switching to another dynamic display mode is prohibited. Each display mode is set. The dynamic display information signal is a signal indicating the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means separately for the first time and the second time added to the first time. Is configured. In the dynamic display mode determination means, the first dynamic display mode determined based on the first time and the second dynamic display mode determined based on the second time are respectively determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. . The switchable period is set within the period in which the first dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the first dynamic display mode set within the switchable period is configured to be set separately, there is an effect that the control load for setting the first dynamic display mode to be switched can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine D1, the switching unit switches between a plurality of preset setting modes based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determining unit, and corresponds to the switched setting mode. The dynamic display mode determining unit is configured to switch to the setting mode switched by the switching unit as the first dynamic display mode based on the first time. A corresponding dynamic display mode is determined, and the second dynamic display mode is determined based on the set setting mode and the second time based on the end of the switchable period. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D2, a plurality of preset setting modes are switched based on the fact that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, and a dynamic display mode corresponding to the switched setting mode The process of switching to is executed by the switching means. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode corresponding to the setting mode switched by the switching unit as the first dynamic display mode based on the first time, and the switchable period has ended. Based on the set setting mode and the second time, the second dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the control load for setting the second dynamic display mode at the start of fluctuation.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the switching means switches the setting modes in order in a predetermined order based on the operation determining means being operated by the operation determining means. Machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the setting mode is sequentially switched in a predetermined order by the switching unit based on the operation unit being operated by the operation determining unit. There is an effect that it can be easily understood which setting mode is switched next by the player's operation.

<Feature E group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of effects determination means for performing the determination of success / failure, an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the result of the determination of the success / failure by the effect determination means, and an effect executed by the effect execution means. In a gaming machine having an effect determining means determined from an effect and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a win. While an effect is being executed by the effect executing means, a plurality of notice effects that are executed by the notice effect executing means and a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect based on the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means. A notice effect determining means determined from the notice effect, a first operation means operable by the player, a second operation means different from the first operation means, and the first operation hand And an operation determining means for determining that the second operating means has been operated, and the plurality of notice effects are based on operations by the first operating means and the second operating means, An operation notice effect that changes the content of the notice effect is included, and the operation notice effect includes at least a first period during which the operation by the first operation means can be performed. During the first period, A gaming machine E1 comprising invalidating means for invalidating operation by the second operating means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect based on the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. An effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the effect determining means from a plurality of effects. Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. While the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, the notice effect executing means is executed by the notice effect executing means based on the result of the success / failure determination by the effect determination means. The notice effect executed by the notice effect executing means is determined by the notice effect determining means from the plurality of notice effects. The operation determining means determines that the first operating means operable by the player and the second operating means different from the first operating means are operated. The plurality of notice effects include an operation notice effect in which the content of the notice effect changes based on operations by the first operation means and the second operation means. In the operation advance notice effect, at least a first period during which the operation by the first operation means is possible is set, and during the first period, the operation by the second operation means is invalidated by the invalidation means. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the correct operation has not been performed by setting the operation to be invalid. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1, the first operating means has a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player, and the second operating means can detect that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to the body. A game that is arranged at a position where the player can detect the player by pressing the pressing unit of the first operation means. Machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the first operation means is provided with a pressing portion that can be pressed by the player in the first operation portion. In addition, a detection unit capable of detecting that a part of the player's body is in contact with or close to the player is provided in the second operation unit. When the player presses the pressing portion of the first operation means, the second operation means is arranged at a position where the player can be detected by the detection portion. Thereby, it is possible to detect both the first operating means and the second operating means, and it is possible to cause the player to perform an effect on the condition that an effect in which both are detected is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easier for a player to play.

  In the gaming machine E2, in the operation advance notice effect, a specification in which the content of the advance notice effect changes based on the fact that the operation determining means determines that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected for a predetermined time or more. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that a notice effect is included.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the content of the notice effect changes based on the fact that the detection unit of the second operation means has detected that the detection is detected for a predetermined time or more. Since the specific notice effect is included in the operation notice effect, the player can provide a novel effect, and the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the operation advance notice effect does not teach the instruction advance notice effect in which the teach effect that teaches the operation timing of the first operation means is executed and the operation timing of the first operation means. A gaming machine E4 including at least a non-teaching notice effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the teaching advance notice effect in which the teaching effect that teaches the operation timing of the first operation means is executed and the operation timing of the first operation means are Since the non-teaching notice effect that is not taught is included in at least the operation notice effect, the more the game is played, the easier it is to display the non-teaching notice effect, and the player can play more games. There is an effect that can be done.

<Feature F group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, a time measurement means capable of timing even when power is not supplied, and a time data acquisition means for acquiring time measurement data from the time measurement means, Based on the timing data acquired by the timing data acquisition means, the timing control means for executing a control process related to a predetermined game, and the timing data acquisition means When it is determined that the operation period has elapsed by the operation period determination means for determining whether or not the operation period set in a period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed from the obtained data, and the operation period determination means And a prohibition setting means for prohibiting the control processing by the timekeeping control means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period of time, and time is measured by the time measuring means even when power is not supplied. Timing data is acquired from the timing means by the timing data acquisition means. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. The operating period determining unit determines whether or not the operating period set in a period shorter than the predetermined period than the acquired data acquired by the time data acquiring unit has elapsed. When it is determined by the operating period determining means that the operating period has elapsed, the control processing by the time measuring control means is prohibited by the prohibition setting means. As a result, the control process can be set to be prohibited by the timing control unit before the period during which the power source unit of the timing unit cannot supply power has elapsed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that incorrect control is executed based on inaccurate timing information due to power shortage.

  In the gaming machine F1, the timing means is configured to be able to count the date and time, and the operation period is set to a date and time set in a period equal to or less than the predetermined period from the time when the gaming machine was manufactured. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the date and time is counted by the timing means. The operation period is set at a date and time set in a period equal to or less than a predetermined period from the time when the gaming machine is manufactured. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a malfunction due to the elapse of a predetermined period.

<Feature G group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has a power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, a time measurement means capable of timing even when power is not supplied, and a time data acquisition means for acquiring time measurement data from the time measurement means, Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, time control means for executing control processing relating to a predetermined game, and the power supply means are supplied to the time measurement means. A power source discriminating unit for discriminating information based on the voltage value, and when the voltage value output from the power source unit by the power source discriminating unit is determined to be less than or equal to a predetermined set value, A gaming machine G1 having a prohibiting means for prohibiting

  According to the gaming machine G1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period of time, and time is measured by the time measuring means even when power is not supplied. Timing data is acquired from the timing means by the timing data acquisition means. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. Information based on the voltage value supplied from the power supply means to the time measuring means is determined by the power supply determination means. When it is determined by the power supply determination means that the voltage value output from the power supply means is equal to or less than a predetermined set value, the control by the timing control means is prohibited by the prohibition means. As a result, when the voltage value supplied to the time measuring means is equal to or lower than the set value, the control processing is set to be prohibited by the time controlling means, so that erroneous control is executed based on inaccurate time information due to power shortage. There is an effect that defects can be suppressed.

<Feature H group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information necessary to execute a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can enter the game ball and the game ball entering the entrance; Dynamic display that dynamically displays identification information indicating the determination result of the success / failure by the determination unit based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit. Control means, storage means for storing the lottery information until at least the lottery condition is satisfied, and display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored in the storage means; When the first condition is satisfied and variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. And whether the variable means is in the second state. When the first release and the second condition that are variable to the first state are satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state so as to be more advantageous to the player than the first release. Variable control means for changing at least to the second opening that is variable, and a game ball enters the entrance opening while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, and the identification information And a start information display control means for causing the display means to display a start display mode indicating the start of the dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the lottery information acquisition means obtains the lottery information necessary to execute the game lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display control unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The variable means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening that is variable by the variable means from the second state to the first state and when the second condition is satisfied, the player is more advantageous than the first opening. The variable control means changes the second opening from the second state to the first state. When the game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, the start display indicating the start of the dynamic display The mode is displayed on the display means by the start information display control means. Thereby, while changing to 2nd opening | release, it can alert | report to a player intelligibly that the identification information based on the game ball having entered into the entrance is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the player will enter the ball with the second opening. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine H1, a game ball is configured to be able to enter at all times, and based on the entrance of the game ball, the lottery information has a constant entrance to be acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and the storage means The lottery information acquired on the basis of having entered the entrance and the lottery information acquired on the basis of having always entered the entrance, respectively. Yes, the lottery information stored in the storage means is such that the lottery information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance is preferentially satisfied with the lottery condition, and the start information display control means includes: A game ball enters the entrance during the second opening, and the identification information indicating the determination result based on the lottery information entered in the regular entrance is dynamically displayed. The start display mode is displayed during the dynamic display. Gaming machine H2, and characterized in that Shimesuru.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means is configured so that the lottery information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance and the game ball can always enter, and the lottery information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball. The lottery information acquired based on the fact that the ball is always entered into the entrance slot acquired by the means is individually stored. In the lottery information stored in the storage means, the lottery conditions are established with priority on the lottery information acquired based on the entrance to the entrance. When the game ball enters the entrance during the second opening, and the identification information indicating the determination result based on the lottery information always entered the entrance is dynamically displayed, A start display mode is displayed by the start information display control means during the dynamic display. Therefore, since the start display mode is displayed before the identification symbol entered at the second opening is dynamically displayed, the identification symbol based on having entered at the second opening in advance is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can be notified.

<Feature I group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information necessary to execute a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can enter the game ball and the game ball entering the entrance; On the basis of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, a determination unit for determining whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied, and a storage unit for storing the lottery information until at least the lottery condition is satisfied. A display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored in the storage means, a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance, and a game ball than the first state. Variable means that can be changed to a second state that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and a first opening that can change the variable means from the second state to the first state when the first condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied, rather than the first opening Based on establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, variable control means for changing the variable means at least to a second opening that is variable from the second state to the first state so as to be advantageous to a technician, A determination unit that determines whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied; a determination information display unit that dynamically displays determination information indicating a determination result by the determination unit; and a display time for dynamically displaying the determination information. Display time determining means for determining, wherein the display time determining means establishes the lottery opportunity a predetermined number of times based on the determination information indicating the second condition being displayed on the determination information display means. The game machine I1 is characterized in that a display time longer than that in the normal state is determined until the time.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the lottery information acquisition means acquires lottery information necessary for executing the game lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. . Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means. The variable means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first opening and the second condition are satisfied, the player is more advantageous to the player than the first opening. The variable means is changed at least by the variable control means to the second opening that is changed from the second state to the first state. Based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery opportunity, the determination means determines whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Determination information indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed by the determination information display unit. The display time for dynamically displaying the determination information is determined by the display time determining means. Based on the display of the determination information indicating the second condition on the determination information display means, the display time determination means determines a display time longer than the normal time until a lottery trigger is established a predetermined number of times. Thereby, even when the second condition is continuously established, the display time longer than the normal time is determined after the second release, so that the identification symbol based on the lottery information stored in the storage means during that time is determined. Is dynamically displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the number of lottery information stored in the storage means becomes excessive.

<Feature J group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information used for a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can be entered, a game ball entering the entrance, and the lottery information acquisition Storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the means until at least a start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means for individually displaying discrimination symbols corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means; Based on the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to execute determination, a symbol display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification symbol When the lottery information is stored in the storage means and the dynamic display mode determining means for determining the display mode, whether the determination is successful or not based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the determination result is a hit, the determination symbol variable display means for changing the display mode of the determination symbol in a display mode capable of identifying the determination result by the prior determination unit, and the determination result A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, a timing means capable of timing, and a timing data discriminating means for discriminating timing data by the timing means. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means when the dynamic display mode is determined to be a predetermined set value by the time data determination is different from other periods. Effect period setting means for setting at least a specific period to be determined and a preparation period for starting the specific period before the specific period, and the discrimination symbol variable means Setting of the preparation period is prohibited when it is determined that the determination symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a more specific determination of success / failure and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the determination symbol ends within the preparation period. A gaming machine J1 having a prohibiting means.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discrimination symbols are individually displayed by the discrimination symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, whether or not the hit is determined is determined by the hit / no-go determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the symbol display unit. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. When the lottery information is stored in the storage unit, whether or not the winning / no-go determination is made is determined based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminating symbol is varied by the discriminating symbol variable display unit in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail judgment unit can be identified. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discriminating means. A specification in which a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined to be different from other periods when it is determined that the preset value is determined by the timing data determination. The period and the preparation period for starting the specific period are set at least by the production period setting means before the specific period. Setting of the preparation period is prohibited when it is determined that the determination symbol is displayed in the display mode indicating the specific success / failure display by the determination symbol variable means and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the determination symbol ends within the preparation period. Prohibited by means. As a result, it is possible to set a period in which the preparation period is not set, and it is possible to predict the success / failure determination result depending on whether or not the player sets the preparation period. Therefore, there is an effect that the gameability can be further improved and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Feature K group>
A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery information used for a lottery of a game based on the entrance of a game ball that can be entered, a game ball entering the entrance, and the lottery information acquisition Storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the means until at least a start condition is satisfied, and a discrimination symbol display means for individually displaying discrimination symbols corresponding to the lottery information stored in the storage means; Based on the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to execute determination, a symbol display unit for displaying an identification symbol indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, and a dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification symbol A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a display mode, and a suggestion that suggests a result of the determination by the determination unit while the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is displayed. Suggestion display control means for displaying the display mode on the display means, suggestion display mode determination means for determining the suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control means based on the result of the determination of correctness / inappropriateness, and the storage In the case where the lottery information is stored in the means, prior determination means for executing the determination on the basis of the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied, and determination by the prior determination means A privileged game that executes a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination symbol variable display means for changing the display mode of the discrimination symbol in a display mode in which the result can be identified, and that the determination result is correct. In a gaming machine having an execution means, a clock means capable of timing, a clock data discriminating means for discriminating clock data by the clock means, When it is determined that the set value is predetermined by data determination, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is determined to be different from the other period. An effect period setting means for setting at least a specific period and a preparation period for prohibiting display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period, and the suggestion display control means are determined by the determination symbol variable means as a specific success / failure determination. It is determined that the discriminating symbol is displayed in the display mode, and that the dynamic display of the discriminating symbol corresponding to the discriminating symbol is started within the preparation period and the dynamic display is ended within the specific period. In this case, the suggestion display mode is displayed after the transition to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine K1, the lottery information used for the lottery of the game is acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit at least until the start condition is satisfied. The discrimination symbols are individually displayed by the discrimination symbol display means corresponding to each lottery information stored in the storage means. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, whether or not the hit is determined is determined by the hit / no-go determining means. An identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the symbol display unit. The dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. While the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is displayed, the suggestion display mode that suggests the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit by the suggestion display control unit. The suggestion display mode displayed by the suggestion display control unit is determined by the suggestion display mode determination unit based on the determination result of the determination by the determination unit. When the lottery information is stored in the storage unit, whether or not to win is determined by the prior hit determination unit based on the stored lottery information before the start condition is satisfied. The display mode of the discriminating symbol is varied by the discriminating symbol variable display unit in a display mode in which the determination result by the prior hit / fail judgment unit can be identified. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Timekeeping data by the timekeeping means capable of timekeeping is discriminated by the timekeeping data discrimination means. A specification in which a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means is determined to be different from other periods when it is determined that the preset value is determined by the timing data determination. The period and the preparation period for prohibiting the display of the suggestion display mode before the specific period are each set by at least the production period setting means. The suggestion display control means displays the discrimination symbol in a display mode indicating a specific success / failure determination by the discrimination symbol variable means, and the dynamic display of the identification symbol corresponding to the discrimination symbol starts dynamic display within the preparation period, When it is determined that the dynamic display is finished within the specific period, the suggestion display mode is displayed by the suggestion display control unit after the transition to the specific period. Thereby, since the suggestion display mode is displayed in the specific period, the player can be expected to enter the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
In the gaming machine K1, the suggestion display control means displays the suggestion display mode on the display means in response to the transition to the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. In other words, the suggestion display mode is displayed on the display means by the suggestion display control means triggered by the transition to the specific period. Therefore, since the suggestion display mode is displayed at the timing of shifting to the specific period, there is an effect that the suggestion display mode can be displayed at the timing synchronized with other same gaming machines.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the determination symbol of the display mode indicating the specific determination of success / failure is a display mode indicating that the determination result of success / failure is a win.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the determination pattern of the display mode indicating the specific determination of success / failure is the result of the determination of success / failure, so that the player wins when the specific period comes There is an effect that it can be recognized and can be recognized easily in a specific period.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the suggestion display mode determination unit is configured to display the suggestion display mode indicating that the determination result by the determination unit is correct when the specific period is set. A gaming machine K4 that determines a specific suggestion display mode.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the specific period is set, the suggestion display mode determination unit determines that the specific suggestion display mode is the suggestion display mode determination unit as the suggestion display mode indicating that the determination result by the determination unit is correct. It is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the value of the specific period can be increased, and the player can expect the specific period.

  In any one of the gaming machine K1 to the gaming machine K4, it has a sound output means capable of outputting sound, and a sound control means for executing control of sound output from the sound output means, the sound control means being When the special game is executed by the special game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, at least the special period is set until the specific period is set. A gaming machine K5 that controls to output a sound volume related to a game at a volume lower than normal.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are produced. That is, the sound control means executes control of sound output from the sound output means capable of outputting sound. When a special game is executed by the special game execution means, if the period until the specific period is set is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, at least the audio related to the special game is recorded until the specific period is set. Control is performed by the sound control means so that the sound volume is output at a sound volume smaller than normal. Therefore, even if it is a big hit before the specified period, it makes it difficult for surrounding players to notice that it is a big hit, and it makes it easier to think as if it was a big hit when the specified period comes be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player think that it is likely to be a big hit in a specific period.

<Feature L group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period, and can measure time even when power is not supplied, and time data acquisition means for acquiring time data from the time measurement means , Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a time control means for executing control processing relating to a predetermined game, and control by the time control means A switching means that can be switched at least to one setting and a second setting that prohibits the control by the timing control means, a switching setting means for switching setting by operating the switching means, and the operation of the switching operation means are controlled. And a game machine L1 having an operation control means.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game machine has power supply means capable of supplying power for a predetermined period of time, and time is measured by the time measuring means even when power is not supplied. Timing data is acquired from the timing means by the timing data acquisition means. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. The switching means switches between a first setting for executing control by the timekeeping control means and a second setting for prohibiting control by the timekeeping control means. Switching is set by the switching setting means by operating the switching means. The operation of the switching operation means is controlled by the operation control means. Thereby, since the switching means is operated and switched by the switching setting means, there is an effect that the setting can be automatically switched without manually setting.

<Feature M group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the execution unit for executing the effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the content determination for determining the content by the execution unit. In a gaming machine having means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination of success or failure is successful, the power is not supplied to the gaming machine However, it has power supply means that can supply power for a predetermined period, and can operate even when power is not supplied, time data acquisition means for obtaining time data from the time measurement means, and time measurement Timing control means for executing a control process related to a predetermined game based on the timing data acquired by the data acquisition means, and the timing means is supplied with power to the gaming machine. If not, switching means for switching between a first state in which power is supplied from the power supply means and a second state in which power is supplied from the gaming machine based on the supply of power to the gaming machine. A gaming machine M1 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the success / failure determination is executed by the failure determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. An effect indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit. The effect content by the effect execution means is determined by the effect content determination means. Based on the determination result, the bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means. Even if no power is supplied to the gaming machine, the power supply means can supply power for a predetermined period of time, and the time measurement data is obtained by the time data acquisition means from the time measurement means operable even when the power is not supplied. To be acquired. Based on the time data acquired by the time data acquisition means, a control process related to a predetermined game is executed by the time control means. In the timing means, when the gaming machine is not supplied with power, the gaming machine is supplied with power based on the first state in which power is supplied from the power supply means and the gaming machine is supplied with power. The second state is switched by the switching means. As a result, the period during which power can be supplied during a period when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine can be lengthened. Therefore, there is an effect that the timing means can be used for a longer time.

<Feature N group>
Main control means for executing control of the game, slave control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and display means, wherein the main control means has a predetermined condition. Based on the establishment, the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information, the storage means for storing the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means at least until the start condition is satisfied, and the establishment of the start condition Based on this, the dynamic determination time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying on the display means the correct / incorrect determination means for executing the correct / incorrect determination and the identification symbol indicating the correct / incorrect determination result by the correct / incorrect determination means. Dynamic display time determining means, dynamic display information generating means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and This A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determining means is stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that it is a win, and the slave control means Is a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol based on the dynamic display information signal, and a display for displaying the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. In the gaming machine having the control means, the slave control means includes an operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means for determining whether the operation means has been operated, and the identification symbol by the operation determination means. Switching means for switching the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on determining that the operating unit has been operated when Secondary control The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining unit is prohibited from switching to another dynamic display mode and the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode by the switching unit. A switching prohibition period to be set, and the dynamic display information signal includes a first time that is a dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means and a dynamic display time And a second time that is the remaining time after a predetermined time elapses, and the dynamic display mode determining means stores the dynamic display mode up to the second time in the storage means. The first dynamic display mode determined based on the number of lottery information and the first dynamic display mode are dynamically displayed and determined based on the second time after the second time. To determine the second dynamic display mode to be A gaming machine N1 characterized in that the gaming machine is N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the game control is executed by the main control means. Based on the control signal from the main control means, control of the game is executed by the sub control means. In the main control means, lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit at least until the start condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment of the starting condition, whether or not the hit is determined is determined by the hit / no-go determining means. The dynamic display time for determining the dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification symbol indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display time determination unit. A dynamic display information generating unit generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control unit of the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining unit. On the basis of the fact that the result of the determination by the determination unit is stopped and displayed with an identification symbol indicating that it is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. In the sub control means, the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the dynamic display information signal. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit is display-controlled by the display control unit. It is determined by the operation determining means whether the operating means operable by the player has been operated. When the identification symbol is dynamically displayed by the operation determination unit, the switching unit switches the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol to another dynamic display mode based on determining that the operation unit is operated. . In the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit of the sub control unit, the switching unit switches to another dynamic display mode and the switchable period set to be switchable to another dynamic display mode. A switching prohibition period during which prohibition is prohibited is set. In the dynamic display information signal, a first time that is the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, and a second time that is the remaining time after a predetermined time of the dynamic display time, It is comprised with the signal which shows. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode up to the second time based on the number of lottery information stored in the storage means. The first dynamic display mode and the first dynamic display mode are dynamic. Since the second dynamic display mode to be determined based on the second time is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means between the display and the second time, the dynamic display mode is determined when the dynamic display starts. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine D3 that is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Then, in order to increase the winning of the game ball to the start opening, an ordinary electric accessory is provided at the start opening. When a lottery that triggers a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the ordinary electric accessory is provided, and a lottery is performed as a game ball passes through the throughgate. There is known a pachinko machine that operates an electric accessory for a certain period of time to make it easy to enter a game ball into a starting port.
In such a pachinko machine, there are a plurality of opening patterns of ordinary electric accessories, and there are two opening patterns: a long opening in which the opening time is longer than normal and a normal opening in which the opening time is set shorter than that. Some are set. Then, there is a notification that informs the player in advance that the long release is determined in a state in which the fluctuation before the start of the normal symbol lottery is suspended. : JP 2013-13528 A).
In this type of pachinko machine, the same holding symbol was displayed for the holding ball that was established after the long opening was executed and entered the starting port, even after entering the ball after the long opening was completed. It is difficult for the player to identify the reason why the holding ball is established, and it is difficult to determine whether or not the player has made a big hit by releasing long. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to play the game with peace of mind.
This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to play a game with peace of mind.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes a lottery of games based on a entrance where a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the entrance. Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information necessary for the determination, the validity determination means for executing the determination on the basis of establishment of the lottery conditions based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and the validity determination means The dynamic display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination as to whether or not, the storage means for storing the lottery information at least until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the lottery stored by the storage means Display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of information, a first state in which a game ball easily enters the entrance, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state Variable means that can be changed to When the first release and the second condition for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state are satisfied, the player is more advantageous to the player than the first release. And a variable control means for changing at least the variable means from the second state to the second opening to be changed from the second state to the first state, and while the variable control means is changing to the second opening, When a game ball enters the entry ball port and the identification information is dynamically displayed, start information display control means for displaying a start display mode indicating the start of the dynamic display on the display means; It is what has.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the lottery information necessary to execute the game lottery is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entrance where the game ball can enter. Obtained by means. Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, the determination of whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is executed by the determination unit. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display control unit. The lottery information is stored in the storage means at least until the lottery condition is satisfied. An identification symbol that can identify the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the display means.
The variable means changes between a first state in which a game ball can easily enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. When the first condition is satisfied, the first opening that is variable by the variable means from the second state to the first state and when the second condition is satisfied, the player is more advantageous than the first opening. The variable control means changes the second opening from the second state to the first state.
When the game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while being changed to the second opening by the variable control means, the start display indicating the start of the dynamic display The mode is displayed on the display means by the start information display control means.
Thereby, while changing to 2nd opening | release, it can alert | report to a player intelligibly that the identification information based on the game ball having entered into the entrance is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the engineer can play the game with peace of mind.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a, 64b 2nd starting port (entrance means )
64c electric auditors product (variable hand stage)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display control means)
203a, 203b Special symbol 1, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
S305-size constant means S406, S413 information acquiring unit S1005 variably controlling hand stage S1703 display control means

Claims (1)

An entrance where game balls can enter,
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information necessary to execute a game lottery based on the game ball entering the entrance;
A determination unit for determining whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit;
Dynamic display control means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means;
Storage means for storing the lottery information at least until the lottery conditions are satisfied;
Display means for displaying an identification symbol capable of identifying the number of lottery information stored in the storage means;
Variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball is likely to enter the entrance and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the first state;
When the first condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state. When the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the player is more advantageous than the first condition. Variable control means for changing at least the variable means from the second state to the second opening that is variable from the second state to the first state;
When a game ball enters the entrance and the identification information is dynamically displayed while the variable control means is changing to the second opening, the dynamic display is started. And a start information display control means for causing the display means to display a start display mode to be displayed.

Images